HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications
RHODES HALL UPS
REPLACEMENT
Project Manual & Specifications
April 8, 2020
Owner Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect Facilities Engineering
Cornell University 201 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853
RHODES HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS UPS REPLACEMENT Page 1
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements
Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References
Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 51 23 Heat During Construction Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents
RHODES HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS UPS REPLACEMENT Page 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413 Penetration Firestopping DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 210517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping 210523 General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping 210529 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 211316 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 260523 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables
260526 Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers & Supports For Electrical Systems 260533 Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems
260553 Identification For Electrical Systems 262413 SwitchBoards 262813 Fuses
263353 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply System 263600 Transfer Switches
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 284621.11 Addressable Releasing System
RHODES HALL TABLE OF CONTENTS UPS REPLACEMENT Page 3
DRAWINGS T-001 Title Sheet
S-001 General Notes, Abbreviations, and Legend S-101 Penthouse Floor Plan S-401 Details F-001 Symbol List, General Notes and Abbreviation List F-101 Partial Penthouse Fire Protection Removal Plan F-102 Basement Fire Protection Plan F-103 Partial Penthouse Fire Protection Plan F-501 Fire Protection Details F-601 Fire Protection Riser Diagram E-001 General Notes and Symbol Legends E-101 Existing and Phase 1 Plans E-102 Phase 2 Plan
E-103 Phase 3 Plan and Perspective E-104 Penthouse Path of Travel E-301 Phase 1 One-Line Diagram
E-302 Phase 2 One-Line Diagram E-303 Phase 3 One-Line Diagram E-304 Final One-Line Diagram E-305 Control Riser Diagram
END OF DOCUMENT
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: RHODES HALL UPS REPLACEMENT Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Facilities Engineering Cornell University 201 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
• Pre-Bid Conference video and other materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/bj3r2pht1b098uueb2gvoc4cnr5gbmoi Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2
b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. In person, on-site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. A pre-recorded video walkthrough, including photos, and diagrams will be posted to a Drop Box for all bidders. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3
3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 9:00AM, June 12, 2020, via Zoom, Facilities Contracts will schedule it through your email contact information. In person, on site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. A pre-recorded video walkthrough, photos, and diagrams will be posted to Drop Box for bidders. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Unit Pricing 8. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4
d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below.
6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5
11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6
b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 2:00PM on June 30, 2020. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at:
https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7
18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Upon discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work or the Project has been deemed essential, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder further agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration Schedule. 1. Work shall be completed within twelve (12) Calendar Weeks from the commencement of construction activities on site. 2. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1
RHODES HALL UPS REPLACEMENT Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM
Vendor Name:
Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable
Street Address, City, State, Zip
Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated April 8, 2020 prepared by Cornell University, Facilities Engineering, 201 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, New York 14853, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with
the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs)
a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows:
• A goal of 3.5% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs.
• A goal of 3.1% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as
follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. 3. Milestone Dates a. Upon project being deemed essential or discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration. i. Work shall be completed within twelve (12) Calendar Weeks from the commencement
of construction activities on site.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2
b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage
of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established.
c. Following are additional Milestone Dates:
d. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in
conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required
Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent
provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds
a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields.
b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3
d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form
– Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values
a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values"
including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1.
c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together
with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution.
e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the
Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work.
c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4
10. Acceptance
a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed
and are accurate. b. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the
Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
d. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an
Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the
time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. e. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (as applicable):
f. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the sole discretion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the Work. g. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. h. Alternates:
1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the
amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications.
Addendum No. __ dated ____.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5
2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal
Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
Bid Proposal Certification Form (this Form) signed and executed
Project Duration Schedule
Bid Bond
Proposed Project Team Resumes
(Bidder)
By:
Title: Business Address: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief:
a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
(Bidder)
By: Title: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General
Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the
bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that
his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and
executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body.
(Secretary-Clerk) Dated:
Rev 12.2018
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR RHODES HALL UPS REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 12.2018
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3
Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4
Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5
Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7
Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7
ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12
ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12
ii Rev 12.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13
Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21
ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26
iii Rev 12.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26
ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28
Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28
ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES
Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30
ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31
ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32
iv Rev 12.2018
EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan
Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation
1 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University".
B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly
provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the
Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner.
E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence
A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of
the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment,
machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or
distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all
materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal"
considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00.
3 Rev 12.2018
B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said
proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect.
All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure.
Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.
B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards.
C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract.
D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor
shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner.
4 Rev 12.2018
Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions
A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions
as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the
Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall
be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor
The Contractor represents and warrants:
A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the
Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or
conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner.
5 Rev 12.2018
B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements
prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions.
C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner.
D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors
A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to five (5) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias.
B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing.
C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work
The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout
Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies
The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
6 Rev 12.2018
Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the
duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project.
Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions
Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor
Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or
injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work.
Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 12.2018
Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work
A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner
that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of
manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing
All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or
concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services
required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in
accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom.
8 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders.
B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods:
1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved.
(i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance
with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup.
(iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes,
temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 12.2018
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of:
(i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site.
(ii) Materials
(iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs.
E. Mark-up Percentages
1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%).
4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall
not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime
pay.
10 Rev 12.2018
6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further
clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage
include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting;
purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the
markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed
in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be
applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense.
H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto.
11 Rev 12.2018
Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work
If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner
or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order;
B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said
alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its
claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books
of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect.
F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy
the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith.
G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section.
12 Rev 12.2018
Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder
Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above.
ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract.
C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the
completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site.
D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension
are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to:
1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather.
13 Rev 12.2018
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be
extended for: 1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order.
H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall
briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner
may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials,
appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination,
but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion.
Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.
14 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall:
1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the
Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed
matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a
dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed
unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed
to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract;
2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission.
15 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed
Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor.
E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and
coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between
Subcontractors and the Owner.
ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear
the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
16 Rev 12.2018
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site
is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any
damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance.
F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions.
G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor
of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage
through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or
operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational
disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form.
17 Rev 12.2018
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets
(OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for
review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label
shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University.
4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found
at: https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision
of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss
in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract.
Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the
Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
18 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.04 - Bonds
A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor
A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or
2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this
section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws.
B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or
claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance
A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance:
1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be
applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000.
19 Rev 12.2018
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard
comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance,
and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate
3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and
hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single
limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors.
20 Rev 12.2018
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the
Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's
expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner
A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for
damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract.
21 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage
Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance
policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all
subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate
of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell
University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work
together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property
of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors
and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature.
22 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance
A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or
release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks.
Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion
A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy
required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction.
Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner.
ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents.
23 Rev 12.2018
B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been
completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses
in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and
materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment.
(b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost
of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E-
Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and
approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor.
24 Rev 12.2018
4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by
the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement
within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment
A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for
permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell
University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following:
1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment.
3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity
(temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment.
25 Rev 12.2018
4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and
a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage.
5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have
been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting
materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment
not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work.
F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06.
B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well.
26 Rev 12.2018
Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments
A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied.
2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor.
6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule.
Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment
A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in
accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39.
d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23.
27 Rev 12.2018
f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22.
2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation.
Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will
then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance
due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a
general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including
sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials.
28 Rev 12.2018
B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation.
ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance
of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various
components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on
the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E".
ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract
The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for
the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner.
29 Rev 12.2018
Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights
Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract.
Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner
A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative
The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render
approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Darlene Hackworth) shall be recognized by the Contractor.
ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the
implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s
demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement.
30 Rev 12.2018
C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in
the Bid Proposal Certification Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be
applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html. E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract.
F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE
participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation.
Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed. B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in
Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly,
reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D".
Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report
31 Rev 12.2018
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of
the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE
goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner
for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor. ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project.
ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor
their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”,
Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be
responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University.
32 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information
The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the
extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not
disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold
all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to
comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the
specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative.
33 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of
ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with
or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell
University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077.
EXHIBIT "A"
CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and
shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request.
Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by
name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to
perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time
of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change.
Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A"
EXHIBIT "A"
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE:
PCO #
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL
PERFORMING WORK COST
TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0
TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due - Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor,
materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon
improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks,
expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and
supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses
(including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "C"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free
(Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date)
(COMPANY) By: Title:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
1
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No.
Project Name:
Contract Value:
Contractor Name and Address:
Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
% Goals MBE: 3.5% WBE: 3.1% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email:
PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE)
Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order
Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list)
Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title:
Signature: Date:
MWBE Contract Percentages Summary %
MBE Totals
WBE Totals
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to
General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year:
General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-
Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade
Dollar Value of
SubContract or
Purchase Order
MBE,
WBE, or
N/A
% of Total
Contract
TOTALS 0 0
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II
SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III
EXHIBIT "E"
LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:TRADE:
EFFECTIVE DATE:
EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate:$
Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour
F.I.C.A.
Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
*Worker's Compensation
*Bodity Injury & Property Damage
Disability
TOTAL %
Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$
*
Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour
Vacation
Health & Welfare
Pension
Annuity
Education / Training
Industry
Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $
Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $
Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
Signature of Authorized Representative:
Print Name:
Print Title:
I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance
with actual and true cost incurred.
Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience
modifications have been applied against manual rate.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "F”
STORED MATERIALS INVOICING
DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR:
REASON FOR REQUEST:
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE:
1 Material Identification
Description:
Quantity:
Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored:
2 Material Value
Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$
3 Certificate of Insurance
Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name
"Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials.
4 Transfer of Title
The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the
time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains
responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and
providing of all warranties.
Signed:
Date:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "G"
Contractor Performance
Evaluation
Project Information
Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________
Project Number___________________________Evaluators;
Project Team_____________________________
Campus_________________________________
Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________
Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________
Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________
Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____
Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____
Type Of Contract
Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___
Project Comments/Description
Performance Evaluation
Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating.
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
1 Quality of Workmanship
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work
a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications
b. Workmanship quality and accuracyc. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity
d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition
e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel
Comments:
2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and
meeting contract schedules and milestones
a. Project schedule quality and completenessb. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule
d. Material deliveries to support project schedulee. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones
f. Productivity of work force
g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues.
Comments:
3 Subcontractor Management
Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance)
Comments:
3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation
For contractor information only
a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
4 MBE/WBE Participation
Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this
project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments:
5 Safety
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safetya. Timely submission of site specific safety program
b. Knowledge of OSHA standards
c. Implementation of safety rules and regulationsd. Promotion and creation of safety awareness
e. Daily overall housekeeping
f. Safety record
g. Response to safety concerns
h. Awareness of public safety
Comments:
6 Contract Administration
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below
a. Timely submission of complet and correct
documentation required for insurance and bond
b. Change order processing
c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings,
and change orders
d. Subcontractor payments made promptlye. Timely submission of complete and correct payment
applications
f. Quality of paperwork
Comments:
7 Working Relationships
Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties
(Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.)
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
8 Supervisory Personnel Rating
Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory
personnel and project management staff
Comments:
9 Contract Close-Out
Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project
a. Timely completion of all punchlist items
b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders
c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's,
As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety)
d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion
of any outstanding audit questionsComments:
Summary Sheet
Project:___________________________________________
Contractor:________________________________________
Rating Per Weight
Performance Categories Category %Scoring
1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0
2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0
3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0
4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0
5 Safety 0 10.00%0
6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0
7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0
8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0
9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0
Over All Rating 0
Rating Reference
Fails to achieve expectation 1
Needs improvement 2
Fully achieves expectation 3
Frequently exceeds expectation 4
Consistently exceeds expectatio 5
OWNER COMMENTS:
OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings:
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE
TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS
In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and
guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC,
OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and
Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of
the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related
work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued.
1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to
any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating
protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel
connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project.
1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to
safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University.
1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses,
entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor
obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary
to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions
and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the
Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety
Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means
associated with any and all of the foregoing elements.
2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site,
project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing
the Contracted Work.
2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of
Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by
applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary
to engage in qualifying construction activities.
2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to:
2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard
the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site
2
2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all
applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State
Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State
Executive Orders
2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with
all applicable job site safety requirements
2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County,
City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State
of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and
contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating
how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of
the Work for the duration of the contract.
3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19
Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19,
pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the
protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to
“COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure
or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the
Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices
are in place, not for substantive review or approval.
3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and
their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement
updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may
request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best
practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their
firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus
that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion.
4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan:
4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov
4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at
www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf
4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication
(Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home
4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html
3
5.0 Project Closure:
5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional
project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to,
photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative.
6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the
implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in
applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to
the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any on-
site construction activity.
April 8, 2020
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RHODES HALL UPS REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ..............................................................1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2
1.5 PARKING ..........................................................................................................2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS...................................................................4
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5 1.11 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................6
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................6
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................6
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .............................................................................................6
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ..........................................................8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................8
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................8
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................8
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...........................................................................1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS .................................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3
3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................2
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3
1.5 SAMPLES..........................................................................................................4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................9 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................10
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS ...............................................................................12
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................12 1.13 DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................13
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................................13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................................13
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1
1.3 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................2
1.4 LEAD .................................................................................................................3 1.5 SITE VISITS ......................................................................................................3 1.6 CONFINED SPACE ..........................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE .....................................2
1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...............................................................................2 1.7 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................................................3 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3
1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4
1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..............................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES .............................................................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1
1.3 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................1
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ..............................................................................4
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................18
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................18
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4 TESTING ...........................................................................................................3
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................3 2.5 SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................5
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS ...................................................5 2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................5 2.11 SECURITY ........................................................................................................5 2.12 FIELD OFFICES ...............................................................................................6
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................6
3.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................6 3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................6 3.3 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................6
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ..............................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ..................................................3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................4 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................4
SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION .................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY............................................................................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................1
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE .................................................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................3
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ...................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES .................................................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4
2.1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................4 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5
3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5
3.4 CLEANING .......................................................................................................7
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...........................................................................................3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................................1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2
April 8, 2020
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES .............................................3
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED .............................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1
1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1
1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING ....................................................................................................1 1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
RHODES HALL SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done
1. Replacement of the existing 300kva UPS system with a new 275kva UPS system.
2. Modification of Fire Protection systems, and installation of new gas detection equipment to support new Energy Storage System codes.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included.
3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install
materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the
requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
RHODES HALL SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including
providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges.
D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area.
E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that
construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative.
G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work.
H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other
than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the
normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel
lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work.
K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services.
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES
A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should
make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards.
B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist.
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction.
1.5 PARKING
A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade
persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary.
C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The
Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Darlene Hackworth) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at
http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm.
D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows:
1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area.
2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site.
E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event
of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding.
B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside
contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more
than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department.
G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative.
H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY.
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. General
1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and
interferences encountered.
3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes.
4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of
conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect.
B. Interference
1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention.
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design
equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs
in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required.
2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.
A. Before Submitting Proposal
1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work.
2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
2. Inspect all adjacent work.
C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings.
2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
RHODES HALL WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. Existing or Archived Drawings
1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The
Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions.
1.11 WORKING HOURS
A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted.
B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager.
C. Contractor shall be responsible to complete and submit a Dispensation of Hours to the
Department of Labor for overtime or extended hours desired to be worked on the project as needed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 14 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes.
a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request
Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products.
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL
A. Equivalents or Approvals - General
1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted.
2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B
of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product.
4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor.
5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding
1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer
and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than
ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract.
2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign
of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work
from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named.
1. Products:
a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include
paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the
phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply
with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with
requirements.
- Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include
paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or
equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will
be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as
provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿
is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not
result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
- Product description.
- Reference standards.
- Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a
formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner.
G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an
unnamed product or manufacturer:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
RHODES HALL SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-8 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be
installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
may subsequently become apparent.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the
Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
RHODES HALL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative(s)
2. Contractor(s)
3. Architect and its professional consultants
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Major suppliers
6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
RHODES HALL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
RHODES HALL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
RHODES HALL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its
representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting.
B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
RHODES HALL ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-1 UPS REPLACEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project.
1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project.
B. There are no fees to utilize this system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation.
B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system.
B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal
C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software:
1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
RHODES HALL ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-2 UPS REPLACEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 8, 2020
2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production
3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly
4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera
5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software
D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and
other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-construction surveys.
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system.
B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project.
C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM
Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and
the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically.
D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner.
E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends.
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign
download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited.
G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00.
H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
RHODES HALL ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-3 UPS REPLACEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 8, 2020
I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports
required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports.
J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to:
1. General Progress Photographs
2. RFI Issues
3. Non-Conforming Work
4. Special Events
5. As required by individual Specification Sections
K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats.
L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits
and agency approvals that relate to the project.
M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team.
N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system.
O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders.
P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system.
Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis.
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project.
B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
RHODES HALL ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-4 UPS REPLACEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM APRIL 8, 2020
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on
the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 50***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
RHODES HALL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list:
a. Site clearing
b. Site utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
RHODES HALL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
c. Foundation work
d. Structural framing
e. Subcontractor work
f. Equipment installations
g. Finishes
h. Pre-Installation meetings
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of
each month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to
review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the
Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
RHODES HALL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after
receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Owner Job Site personnel
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the
projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
RHODES HALL PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Progress Submittals
1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph.
2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs.
3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction.
3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work.
B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review.
C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
RHODES HALL PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work,
for submission as project record documents.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
5. Coordination Drawings
6. Certification of Asbestos free products
7. Owner audio/visual
8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment
B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved
with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non-
electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE
A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications,
listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents.
C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information:
1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor
review)
3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review)
4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review)
5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review)
6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional)
7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required)
9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required)
12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required)
D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below.
E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described
in Section 01 32 16.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all
submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned
electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with
material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show
approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
6. Submittals:
a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for
electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause
such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to
rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. Submittals:
1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”.
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item.
C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping
including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings.
2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information
and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit
signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the
Work in accordance with the design intent.
6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work.
7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible.
8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s)
affected by the adjustments.
9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
11. Indicate required installation sequences.
12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers.
15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment,
and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully-
dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other
items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor.
17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-
protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance.
18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations.
19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing,
flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall
sign and date coordination drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so
inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with
existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building.
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change
in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39.
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed
to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened.
An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in
processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the
information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents.
4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful
description.
5. Include the following information on submittal documentation:
a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as
appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps
f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals.
7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Submittal Transmittal:
1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed.
2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package
sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual.
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following:
1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if
necessary to obtain different action mark.
4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RHODES HALL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate,
or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them.
7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including
Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect.
a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.13 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
RHODES HALL GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN
A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template
below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements.
2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment.
3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment.
B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must
submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or
milestone.
1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
RHODES HALL GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are
required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work.
D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained
throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP.
E. Definitions:
1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
• The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code).
• The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building
Code-§202.2).
3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be
contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu
4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert.
1.3 ASBESTOS
A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos.
At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building.
C. Removal and disposal of asbestos containing material shall be performed by the Owner under separate contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
RHODES HALL GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.4 LEAD
A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance
with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint.
1.5 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
1.6 CONFINED SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
April 23, 2020
Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II
Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management
FM Administration
116 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853-3701
Re: Rhodes Hall (2051) UPS Replacement Project
Asbestos Inspection Report
Cornell Task Authorization No. TA-284, Work Order No. 12549128
Delta Project No.: 2019.003.279
Dear Mr. Houseknecht:
The following information is associated with the Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement Project. On
Wednesday, April 14th, 2020 Delta Inspector Thomas Ferro was onsite to perform a Pre-
Renovation Asbestos Survey for the project. Based on a review of the 95% Submission Project
Drawing Set (dated March 20, 2020) a visual inspection of the affected areas/associated
materials with the potential to be impacted by the project, and a review of existing bulk sample
information for the building, no asbestos bulk sampling was performed as a part of this Pre-
Renovation Asbestos Inspection/Survey. This is based on the fact that suspect materials with the
potential to be impacted were previously sampled. The accessible suspect materials, and other
non-suspect materials included:
• Sheetrock and Joint Compound - Previously Sampled and reported as Non-Asbestos
• Spray On Fireproofing - Previously Sampled and reported as Non-Asbestos
• Concrete Walls and Floors - Non-Suspect
• Vinyl-coated Wiring – Non-Suspect
• Metal Ceiling Decks – Non-Suspect
• CMU Walls filled with loose-fill Vermiculite, which must be considered Asbestos
Containing as per NYS DOH / NYS DOL.
Based on the above, the only identified asbestos containing material with the potential to be
impacted by the Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement Project is the loose-fill vermiculite assumed
to be present in all CMU walls on the Basement Level and Penthouse Level. The ACM
loose-fill vermiculite would be impacted by any necessary CMU Wall demolition and any
new wall penetrations / openings necessary for the installation of new conduit, piping,
structural steel, wiring, etc.. The demolition of any CMU Wall Section and the installation
/ creation of any new CMU Wall openings / penetrations would have to be performed as an
Asbestos Abatement Project.
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 5
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
I have attached Photos of the accessible materials observed to be present, as well as Delta
Company and Personnel Licenses/ Certifications. If you have any questions, or require any other
information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience.
Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC
Stephen Prislupsky
Director of Environmental Services
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of 5
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment A
Photos
CMU Block Wall with “assumed” asbestos containing loose-fill vermiculite
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 4 of 5
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Non-Asbestos Spray-on Fireproofing on non-suspect metal deck
Non-Suspect Concrete Floors / Equipment Pads
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 5 of 5
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment B
Licenses and Certifications
New York State – Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health
License and Certificate Unit
State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Delta Engineers, Architects & Land Surveyors, D.P.C.
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
FILE NUMBER: 05-0851
LICENSE NUMBER: 29322
LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED
DATE OF ISSUE: 08/28/2019
EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/2020
Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan.
3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier.
4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials.
6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this
Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications.
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE
A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils.
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area.
C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion.
1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these
requirements
1.7 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to
control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of
the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees
shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or
specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer
authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures.
1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air
emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves,
switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative.
1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of
any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at
the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or
disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
RHODES HALL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or
vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health
and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
RHODES HALL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a
containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not
compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible
so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
RHODES HALL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been
removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency
personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other
immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
RHODES HALL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate
departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation
procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply:
TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an
impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence.
Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
RHODES HALL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site.
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the
release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases.
(1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s
spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline;
or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition.
1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca.
D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting:
1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a
fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State.
2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for
this type of work.
3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
RHODES HALL REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall
comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings.
B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
C. Install All Work in Compliance with:
1. NYS Uniform Code
a. International Building Code
b. International Residential Code
c. International Existing Building Code
d. International Fire Code
e. International Plumbing Code
f. International Mechanical Code
g. International Fuel Gas Code
h. International Property Maintenance Code
i. Uniform Code Supplement
2. NYS Energy Code
a. International Energy Conservation Code
b. ASHRAE 90.1
c. Energy Code Supplement
3. National Electric Code
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
6. All local ordinances
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement.
C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction.
E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation.
F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized
representative.
G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner.
H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor.
I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval.
J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.”
L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position.
P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for.
Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above
ceilings, either permanent or removable.
S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed.
T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the
course of project construction.
V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The
“record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that
are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work.
X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes.
AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS
A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council,
Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters
Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows:
All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed
as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925
www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800
www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253
Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155
www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559
www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811
www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604
www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846
www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440
www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400
www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000
www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339
www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323
www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265
www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333
www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902
www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422
www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000
www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167
www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322
www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322
www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
RHODES HALL REFERENCES 01 42 00-18 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 42 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
RHODES HALL QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved
submittals and products.
a. Agenda to include the following:
i. Appointment
ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements.
v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration.
viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500.
ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
RHODES HALL QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and
undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410.
xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
xii. Special safety requirements and procedures.
b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
i. Project Manager.
ii. Project Field Supervisor
iii. Subcontractor
iv. Architect’s Representative
v. Owner’s Representative
vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
vii. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a
representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work.
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
RHODES HALL QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an
installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may
direct.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes,
standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site.
B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire
alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments
a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system
coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed.
- Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global.
- No fire watch will be required in most cases.
b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed.
- Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service.
- Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be
removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas.
6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting.
7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-
protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during
construction.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions.
4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions.
6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection
certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall
provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All
supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the
Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same.
2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary
to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets.
2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials.
3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.
4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects.
B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from
construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible.
3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers
as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of
water at all times.
B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such
water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades.
3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site from
public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas.
B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of
flow from adjacent areas.
C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing dust.
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor shall install Owner provided project identification signage.
2.11 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2.12 FIELD OFFICES
A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of
the Contractor and Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal
of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition.
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and
utilities.
2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its
operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be
maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in
all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code.
E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows:
1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence.
2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel.
F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so
that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat.
G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns.
H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR
A. Use of Existing Elevator
1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment
within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved
by the Owner's Representative.
c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of
Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use.
d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project.
e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use.
f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such
protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish
entire unit, or provide new units as required.
h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work
2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work.
B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work.
C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing.
1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each return-
air grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.
D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
RHODES HALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the
Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture
intrusion that is detrimental to the Project.
2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times.
B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 23 Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
RHODES HALL HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 01 51 23-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish the following:
1. Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold temperatures.
2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract.
B. Include in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required.
C. Existing central steam systems may be used to the extent that they do not interfere with the safe and effective completion of Work. However, any modifications to existing systems shall be corrected prior to the conclusion of work.
D. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat.
E. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall be returned to functional order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary heat.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to provide heat during any portion of the Work.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 51 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
RHODES HALL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source.
B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat
and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
RHODES HALL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The
Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE
A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road location shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss.
B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage site associated with the Contractor’s storage.
C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road site.
D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found.
E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally
or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows:
1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally.
F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents.
G. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
RHODES HALL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.5 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be
necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately
against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks,
gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc.
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
RHODES HALL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used
by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to
foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution
of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that
would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s
aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and
roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight.
b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in-place or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or
performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water.
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor
and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and
comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory
materials compatible with in-place materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
RHODES HALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to
a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base
sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and
patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
RHODES HALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion:
1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete.
3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective.
4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department.
a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS.
b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS
and NFPA.
c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions:
- Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
RHODES HALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
- Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more
than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system
- Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump.
- A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components.
- A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified.
- A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified
- An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement.
- A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and
Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete
work will be furnished to the Contractor.
2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems.
B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
RHODES HALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the
completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its
failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire
floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing
condition.
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement
of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
RHODES HALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
RHODES HALL FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel
template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
RHODES HALL FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
• Building Equipment
• AC Drive/VSD
• Air Dryer
• Backflow Preventor
• Air Compressor
• Building
• Sprinkler
• Control
• Vacuum
• Fan
• Exhaust
• Supply
• Return
• Fume Hood
• Furnace
• Generator
• Hot Water Heater
• Heat Exchangers
• Boiler
• Tank
• Unit Heater
• Fan Coil
• VAV Box
• Transfer Switch
• Motor
• Pump
• Fan
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work.
2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form.
1. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
c. Drawings in electronic format
- Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format.
d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide type description of product, and major component parts of
equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks.
- Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
- Title of Project
- Identity of separate structure as applicable.
- Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Submittal Data:
1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
d. Certification as to asbestos free
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the
product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals.
B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
RHODES HALL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and
procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
RHODES HALL WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
RHODES HALL WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds.
B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by
Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any.
1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a
system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an
emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours.
2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty.
3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility.
4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours,
the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor.
5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are
done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
RHODES HALL WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove
and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it
has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is
required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days
of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
RHODES HALL WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the
respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor.
B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references.
C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Item description.
3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat)
4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer?
5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number.
6. Scope.
7. Duration.
a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
8. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
RHODES HALL WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date
of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
RHODES HALL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative
and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
RHODES HALL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
C. Drawings
As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a
drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional,
or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner.
The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction:
1. Architectural:
a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code
b. Wall, door, window locations
c. Built in casework locations
d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations
e. Material and products where submittals are requested
2. Civil and Structural
a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested
c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems
d. Site related elements including:
- Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data.
e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction.
f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems
g. Geotechnical subsurface information
h. Items that will require future maintenance
i. Life safety critical items
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
RHODES HALL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection)
a. Products where submittals are requested
b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork.
d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork.
e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators.
f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance
dampers and fire dampers.
g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage.
4. Electrical
a. Products where submittals were requested.
b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type.
c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access
Control/Security systems.
d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies.
e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions.
5. Environmental
a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure
D. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
RHODES HALL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 UPS REPLACEMENT APRIL 8, 2020
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39***
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR RHODES HALL UPS REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications:
a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Penetration firestopping Work is part of an allowance.
1.4 UNIT PRICES
A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified
testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping
system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having
jurisdiction prior to submittal.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2
B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to
FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and
found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified
testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide."
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less
than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.
D. Manufactured Piping Penetration Firestopping System: Penetration firestopping systems with
ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water
leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
4. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A48/A48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one
end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents
or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-
shrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,
comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer
speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings
immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage
and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with
the words "FIRE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3
inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible floor-ceiling space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not
exceeding 30 feet.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6
B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or
plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of the
penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove
penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels
with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed.
Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to
ASTM E2174.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed
because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek
Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7
C. Where FM Approval-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM
Approval's "Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."
D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:
1. UL-Classified Systems: 1001-1999.
2. F-Rating: 2 hours.
3. T-Rating: 2 hours.
4. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
5. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.
E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Electrical Cables:
1. UL-Classified Systems: 3001-3999.
2. F-Rating: 2 hours.
3. T-Rating: 2 hours.
4. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
5. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.
F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:
1. UL-Classified Systems: 6001-6999.
2. F-Rating: 2 hours.
3. T-Rating: 2 hours.
4. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
5. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.
G. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:
1. UL-Classified Systems: 8001-8999.
2. F-Rating: 2 hours.
3. T-Rating: 2 hours.
4. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
5. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.
END OF SECTION 078413
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 1
SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or
galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description:
1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space
between piping and sleeve.
2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 2
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size.
4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in
concrete slab or wall.
B. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or
floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
3. Using grout, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 3
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier
Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Use grout, to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 4
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 210517
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
210523 - 1
SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Two-piece ball valves with indicators.
2. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.
3. Check valves.
4. Iron OS&Y gate valves.
5. Trim and drain valves.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NRS: Non-rising stem.
B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.
3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
210523 - 2
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Obtain each type of valve from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings
listed below and shall bear UL mark:
1. Fire Main Equipment: HAMV - Main Level
a. Ball Valves, System Control: HLUG - Level 3
b. Butterfly Valves: HLXS - Level 3
c. Check Valves: HMER - Level 3
d. Gate Valves: HMRZ - Level 3
2. Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices: VDGT - Main Level
a. Valves, Trim and Drain: VQGU - Level 1
B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed
below:
1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:
a. Valves.
1) Gate valves.
2) Check valves
3) Miscellaneous valves.
C. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
D. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
E. NFPA Compliance for valves:
1. Comply with NFPA 13.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
210523 - 3
F. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher, as
required by system pressures.
G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
H. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain
valves.
2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.
3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.
2.3 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. Description:
1. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global approved for indicating valves
(butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3. Body Design: Two piece.
4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.
5. Port Size: Full or standard.
6. Seats: PTFE.
7. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
9. Actuator: Worm gear
10. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.
11. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.
12. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.
2.4 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. Description:
1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type),
Class Number 112.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with EPDM coating.
4. Seat Material: EPDM.
5. Stem: Stainless steel.
6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM coated.
7. Actuator: Worm gear.
8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.
9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
210523 - 4
2.5 CHECK VALVES
A. Description:
1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3. Type: Single swing check.
4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze.
5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel.
6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel.
8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.
9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.
2.6 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES
A. Description:
1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y-
and NRS-type gate valves).
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.
4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.
5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.
6. Stem: Brass or bronze.
7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.
8. Supervisory Switch: External.
9. End Connections: Flanged.
2.7 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
b. Body Design: Two piece.
c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.
d. Port size: Full or standard.
e. Seats: PTFE.
f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
h. Actuator: Handlever.
i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends.
j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING
210523 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve-installation requirements
and applications:
1. Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-
suppression sprinkler systems.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply, except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs,
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
Provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install valve tags. Comply with the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which
valves are installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system
controlled by each valve.
END OF SECTION 210523
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 1
SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Fastener systems.
3. Equipment supports.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 2
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.
2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved
for fire-suppression piping support.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot-dip galvanized.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedge-
type anchors, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Indoor Applications: Stainless steel.
2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated
equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
D. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and
listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support
piping from building structure.
B. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in
accordance with approvals and listings.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
E. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 4
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finishes.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 5
D. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile
environment applications.
E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise
indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no
insulation is required.
3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements.
H. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and
except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
I. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except
as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
210529 - 6
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
J. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
K. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete
construction.
END OF SECTION 210529
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 1
SECTION 211316 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Specialty valves.
3. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Manual control stations.
7. Control panels.
8. Pressure gauges.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 210523 "General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping" for
ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator, and trim and drain valves.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure of 250-psig maximum.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 2
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
B. Design Data:
1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,
that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic
calculations if applicable.
C. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
D. Field Test Reports:
1. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
2. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as
described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping."
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 3
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Double-Interlock Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing low-pressure air. Actuation of a fire-detection system or manual pull stations, located
in same area as sprinklers, will activate the normally closed solenoid but will not open the pre-
action valve. Activation of a sprinkler head will not permit water to flow into sprinkler piping.
Activation of both the normally closed solenoid valve and automatic sprinkler is required to
cause the pre-action valve to open, permitting water to flow into sprinkler piping, and water will
then discharge from opened sprinkler.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with
NFPA 13.
C. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 250-psig minimum working pressure.
D. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Energy Storage Space: Extra Hazard, Group 1.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. area.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Energy Storage Spaces: 120 sq. ft.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 4
6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless
otherwise indicated:
a. 100 gpm at the top of the standpipe for 90 to 120 minutes.
b. 400 gpm at the water supply source for 90 to 120 minutes.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard-Weight, Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F. Pipe ends may be factory or field
formed to match joining method.
B. Schedule 40, Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M; ASTM A795/A795M, ASTM A53/A53M
Type F; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends
may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
C. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight, seamless steel
pipe with threaded ends.
D. Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
H. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 250-psig minimum.
2. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron
casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval Guide."
B. Pressure Rating:
1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250-psig minimum.
C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Size: Same as connected piping.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 5
E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F. Pre-Action Valves:
1. Standard: UL 260.
2. Design: Hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type.
3. Include trim sets for alarm-test bypass, drain, electrical water-flow alarm switch, pressure
gauges, drip cup assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, and
fill-line attachment with strainer.
4. Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and water-pressure gauges;
low-air-pressure warning switch; air relief valve; and actuation device. Dry, pilot-line
actuator includes cast-iron, operated, diaphragm-type valve with resilient facing plate,
resilient diaphragm, and replaceable bronze seat. Valve includes threaded water and air
inlets and water outlet. Loss of air pressure on dry, pilot-line side allows pilot-line
actuator to open and causes deluge valve to open immediately.
5. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:
a. Standard: UL 260.
b. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.
c. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,
bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure,
strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 300-psig outlet
pressure.
6. Air Compressor:
a. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval
Guide."
b. Motor Horsepower: Fractional.
1) Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.
c. Sized for application and capable of achieving system supervisory pressure within
30 minutes in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13. Provide ASME air
receiver tank as required to meet requirements on larger systems.
d. Include filters, relief valves, coolers, automatic drains, and gauges.
G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1726.
2. Pressure Rating: 250-psig minimum.
3. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
4. Size: NPS 3/4.
5. End Connections: Threaded.
2.5 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General Requirements for Preaction System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
B. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 6
4. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.
5. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval
Guide."
2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
D. Branch Line Testers:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Pressure Rating: 300-psig minimum.
3. Body Material: Brass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval
Guide."
2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.
3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.6 SPRINKLERS
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval Guide."
B. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 8.0, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes: Brass.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 7
2.7 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Pressure Switches - Water-Flow Alarm Detection:
1. Standard: UL 346.
2. Type: Electrically supervised, pressure-activated water-flow switch.
3. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw switches.
4. Design Operation: Rising pressure to 6 psi, plus or minus 2 psi signals water flow.
5. Adjustability: Each switch is to be independently adjustable.
6. Wire Separation: Pressure switch to provide separation of wiring to each switch
connection to allow for low and high volume connections to comply with NFPA 70
Article 760 requirements.
C. Pressure Switches - Low/High Air Pressure Supervisory:
1. Standard: UL 346.
2. Type: Electrically supervised pressure supervisory switch.
3. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw switches.
4. Design Operation: Detects increase and/or decrease from normal supervisory air pressure.
5. Adjustability: Each switch is to be independently adjustable.
6. Wire Separation: Pressure switch shall provide for separation of wiring to each switch
connection to allow for low and high voltage connections to comply with NFPA 70
Article 760 requirements.
D. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. General Requirements for Valve Supervisory Switches:
a. Standard: UL 346.
b. Type: Electrically supervised.
c. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
d. Wire Terminal Designations: Indicates normal switch position when switch is
properly installed on the valve and valve is fully open.
2. Requirements for OS&Y Valve Supervisory Switches:
a. Components: One or two single-pole, double-throw switches.
b. NEMA Rating: NEMA 4 and NEMA 6P enclosures suitable for mounting in any
position indoors or outdoors.
c. Visual Switch Indication: Indicates device is properly installed and OS&Y valve is
fully open.
d. Mounting Hardware: Mounting bracket to grip valve yoke and prevent movement
of switch assembly on OS&Y valve.
e. Trip Rod Length: Adjustable.
3. Requirements for Butterfly Valve Supervisory Switches:
a. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw switches.
b. NEMA Rating: NEMA 4 and NEMA 6P enclosures suitable for mounting in any
position indoors or outdoors.
c. Mounting Hardware: Removable nipple.
d. Trip Rod Length: Adjustable.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 8
4. Requirements for Ball Valve Supervisory Switch:
a. Components: One single-pole, double-throw switch.
b. NEMA Rating: NEMA 4 enclosure suitable for mounting in any position indoors
or outdoors.
c. Mounting Hardware: Suitable for mounting directly to pipe, ball valves or
backflow preventers sized from up to NPS 2.
2.8 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval Guide" for
hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve.
B. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions
and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.9 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: See Specification 284621.11 Addressable Releasing Systems. Include
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of
deluge valves.
1. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM Global's "Approval Guide"
when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring.
2. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application
B. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION," with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent
accidental opening.
C. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball
valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION," with operating
instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Standard: UL 393.
B. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
C. Pressure Gauge Range: 0 to 300 psig.
D. Label: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
E. Air System Piping Gauge: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to
water-distribution piping.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 10
I. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1. Pressure gauges and controls.
2. Electrical power system.
3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gauges to
permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.
M. Drain preaction sprinkler piping.
N. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air compressors.
O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-
Suppression Piping."
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. All joining methods that result in a seam shall be done in a manner that results in the seam
being oriented on top of all piping.
F. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 11
H. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
J. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.
2. Install preaction valves with trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm
connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line
attachment.
a. Install air compressor and compressed-air-supply piping.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 12
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run air compressors.
6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any
sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified
fittings.
B. Standard-pressure, preaction-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the
following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
2. Schedule 40, steel pipe with plain ends; plain-end-pipe fittings; and twist-locked joints.
3. Schedule 40, steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel
piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211316 - 13
C. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the
following:
1. Schedule 10, steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
2. Schedule 10, steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel
piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
D. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and NPS 6, shall be one of the following:
1. Schedule 10, steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
2. Schedule 10, steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel
piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Upright Sprinklers: Rough bronze
END OF SECTION 211316
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260500
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260500 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
2. Sleeve seals.
3. Grout.
4. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more
than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and
1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260500
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260500 - 2
4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260500
Ithaca, New York COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260500 - 3
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519
Ithaca, New York LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260519 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519
Ithaca, New York LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260519 – 2
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex Co.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 14 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 14 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 12 AWG and
larger, unless otherwise noted.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519
Ithaca, New York LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260519 – 3
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-
steel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519
Ithaca, New York LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260519 – 4
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve
seal is to be installed.
G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
K. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
L. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and
size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260519
Ithaca, New York LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260519 – 5
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical
equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
a. Generator
b. Fire Pump
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling.
2. RS-232 cabling.
3. RS-485 cabling.
4. Low-voltage control cabling.
5. Control-circuit conductors.
6. Identification products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
B. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs
of a wall cavity).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
B. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATHWAYS
A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6e cabling, designed to
prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high and 2-1/2 inches deep.
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with
requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.
2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
3. CommScope, Inc.
4. Draka USA.
5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
6. KRONE Incorporated.
7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.
8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
9. Superior Essex Inc.
10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.
11. 3M.
12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6e.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG.
b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.
c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 3
d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX.
e. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG.
f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.
2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
2. Dynacom Corporation.
3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
4. KRONE Incorporated.
5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.
6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
8. Panduit Corp.
9. Siemon Co. (The).
10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or
tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.
C. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables
terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs
and jacks where indicated.
2.5 RS-232 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain
wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Plastic insulation.
3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain
wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 4
2.6 RS-485 CABLE
A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.
1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
C. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 5
2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with
UL 83.
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with
UL 83.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF,
complying with UL 83.
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Brady Corporation.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends
between pull points.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
for installation of conduits and wireways.
C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is
installed or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 6
E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly
and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30
inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames,
and terminals.
5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull
tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain
cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces
with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings
by cable supports not more than 48 inches apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other
potentially damaging items.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 7
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating
unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and
Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables.
3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG, unless specified on
drawings.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260523
Ithaca, New York CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260523 - 8
3.6 GROUNDING
A. For data communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,
"Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings.
Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect
cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity
between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables
after termination but not after cross connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-
B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in
"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy
specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords
and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link
test configuration.
D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument
to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports and submit to Owner.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260526 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260526 - 2
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel 5/8 by 96 inches in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for 10 gauge AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors
for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and
power-distribution units.
10. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits
supplying x-ray equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260526 - 3
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
G. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed
with branch-circuit conductors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260526 - 4
C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems,"
and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260526
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260526 - 5
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529
Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260529-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of [five] times
the applied force.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529
Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260529-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529
Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260529-3
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A
325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529
Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260529-4
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-
1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may
be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than
4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260529
Ithaca, New York HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260529-5
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. See Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks and manholes, and underground handholes, boxes, and utility construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
C. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
E. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: set-screw or compression type.
3. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-2
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D.
4. GE
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
3. Or approved equal.
B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard
enamel finish in color selected by Architect/Engineer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-3
a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b. Hubbell Inc.
c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
d. MonoSystems Inc.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with
texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
b. Carlon Electrical Products.
c. Panduit Corp.
d. Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division.
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable rectangular.
E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed
cover.
H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
I. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, RNC, Type EPC-80-
PVC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit EMT] [RNC, Type EPC-40-
PVC].
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried, EPC-40-concrete
encased.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise noted.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT or RNC identified for such use.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes
raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT or FMC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit RNC Type EPC-40 PVC or LFMC.
7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT or as otherwise noted.
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic
in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6-inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-5
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire and
tie off securely.
J. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:
1. One (1) inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for luminaire
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
M. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
N. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
O. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260533
Ithaca, New York RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260533-6
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 2
D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit
diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSIA13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide;
compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 3
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in
place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl
overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag:
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription
of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils.
3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.
4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 4
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20
sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with white letters on black face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be
1 inch.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 5
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope
exceeds 16 inches overall.
G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways more than 600V: Identify with “DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE” in
black letters at least 2 inches high with self-adhesive vinyl labels. Repeat legend at 10-foot
maximum intervals.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600V or less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits more than 50 A, and 120V to ground: Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Metal-Clad Cables 600V or less, install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 6
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend
and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. FA.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600V or less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600V or less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded [service] [feeder] [and] [branch-circuit] conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied [or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG,
if authorities having jurisdiction permit].
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
F. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 7
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels or Baked-enamel warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer and load shedding.
N. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Screw mounted, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine
label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide five lines of text:
1) First line: 1/2-inch letters on the first line stating equipment name.
2) Second line (if applicable): 3/8-inch letters stating the existing equipment
name in Parentheses ( ).
3) Third line: 3/8-inch letters stating voltage/phase.
4) Fourth line: 3/8-inch letters stating the breaker number, panel name and
room number/name (Owner’s room number) from which the equipment is
fed.
5) Fifth line: 3/8-inch letters stating function and/or equipment which it
controls.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 260553
Ithaca, New York IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 260553 - 8
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
2. Receptacle Labeling: Label shall be using Dymo Posiprinter, black lettering on clear tape
stating panel and breaker number from which it is fed.
3. Equipment to be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Electrical substations.
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Disconnect switches.
h. Enclosed circuit breakers.
i. Motor starters and variable frequency drives.
j. Push-button stations.
k. Power transfer equipment.
l. Contactors.
m. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
n. Battery inverter units.
o. Battery racks.
p. Power-generating units.
q. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
r. Fire-alarm control panel, annunciators, devices.
s. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets,
and racks.
t. Monitoring and control equipment.
u. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for
signal and control functions.
v. Receptacles.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262413
Ithaca, New York SWITCHBOARDS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262413 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2. Transient voltage suppression devices.
3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
4. Instrumentation.
5. Control power.
6. Accessory components and features.
7. Identification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
2. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards.
3. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with UL 891.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262413
Ithaca, New York SWITCHBOARDS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262413 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Eaton Corporation.
B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3. Sections front and rear aligned.
C. Nominal System Voltage: 480V, 3 phase, 3 wire.
D. Main-Bus Continuous: 1200, 600 Amp.
E. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
1. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a
rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking.
F. Cubical Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each
vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.
G. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section.
H. Space-Heater Power Source: 120-V external branch circuit.
I. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with
utility company's requirements. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service
entrance features. Provide separate meter box as indicated on drawings.
J. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
K. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
L. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:
1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as
switchboard.
2. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily
removable for drilling and cutting.
3. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into
switchboard.
4. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables
indicated, including those for future installation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262413
Ithaca, New York SWITCHBOARDS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262413 - 3
M. Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three phase, four-wire unless otherwise indicated.
Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade copper with tin-plated circuit-breaker line
connections.
1. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch minimum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent
conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground
conductors.
2. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
3. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state,
parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449,
second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit
rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
3. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of
any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.
4. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.
C. Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with
less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-
replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262413
Ithaca, New York SWITCHBOARDS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262413 - 4
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I
2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent
of rated voltage.
g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. Refer to drawings
and Uniterruptible Power Supply Specification 265330 for interlock operation.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according to NECA
400.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on floor mounted strut.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and
instrumentation.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262413
Ithaca, New York SWITCHBOARDS
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262413 - 5
F. Comply with NECA 1.
G. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section
"Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and
specialties.
H. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Division 26 Section "Cable
Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings,
and specialties.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262813
Ithaca, New York FUSES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262813 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in switchboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent
with circuit voltages.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: KRP-C Class L, time delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 262813
Ithaca, New York FUSES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 262813 - 2
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This specification describes a three-phase continuous duty, on-line, double conversion,
three-level converter topology, solid-state uninterruptible power system, hereafter
referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the existing building
electrical system to provide power conditioning, back-up and distribution for critical
electrical loads. The UPS system shall consist of, as required by the project, the UPS
modules, battery cabinet(s), maintenance bypass, and other features as described in this
specification and on the construction drawings.
1.02 UPS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. UPS System Components: The UPS system shall consist of the following main
components:
1. One integrated system bypass module (ISBM) and one or more internal
uninterruptible power modules (UPM’s). The ISBM includes a Static Bypass
and associated Control and Monitor Panel, and each UPM includes a Rectifier,
Inverter, and Battery Charger.
2. Battery string(s) in matching Battery Cabinets, or Flywheel in matching
Flywheel Cabinets.
3. Matching accessory cabinets for maintenance bypass.
4. Non-matching wall mounted or floor standing maintenance bypass cabinets.
B. UPM Modes of Operation: Each UPM shall operate as an on-line, fully automatic system
in the following modes:
1. Standard: Utilizing commercial AC power, the critical load shall be continuously
supplied by the Inverter. The Inverter shall power the load while regulating both
voltage and frequency. The Rectifier shall derive power from the commercial
AC source and shall supply DC power to the Inverter. Simultaneously, the
Battery Charger shall charge the battery.
2. Battery or Flywheel: Upon failure of the commercial AC power, the critical load
shall continue to be supplied by the Inverter, which shall obtain power from the
batteries or flywheel without any operator intervention. There shall be no
interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the commercial AC
source.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC source, the Charger shall recharge the
batteries or flywheel and simultaneously the Rectifier shall provide power to the
Inverter. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to
the critical load.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 2
4. Bypass: If the UPM must be taken out of the Online mode for overload, load
fault, or internal failures, the static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the
critical load to the commercial AC power. Return from Bypass mode to Normal
mode of operation shall be automatic. No-break transfer to and from Bypass
mode shall be capable of being initiated manually from the front panel.
5. Energy Saver (ESS) Feature: The UPS shall continuously monitor the voltage
and frequency of the bypass source. When the source parameters are within
acceptable limits, the UPS will utilize a minimal/optimal combination of its
internal subsystems to ensure acceptable power is always delivered to the critical
load, at a system efficiency of 99% or greater, over the range of 10% to 100%
load. The Energy Saver System shall be enabled by the user and shall be
adjustable. It shall incorporate a “High Alert Mode” to automatically (without
user intervention) provide maximum power conditioning any time bypass source
variation levels exceed preset, adjustable limits. When Energy Saver System is
utilized, the UPS must attenuate ANSI C62.41-type line transients to within IEC
and ITIC limits. The Energy Saver System shall be able to distinguish between
upstream (utility) faults and downstream (load) faults and react appropriately to
protect and support the critical load, without interruption.
6. Variable Module Management System Feature: The modular UPS shall offer the
ability to scale its capacity and/or redundancy by automatically shifting load to
fewer 300 kW power modules (aka. UPM’s). The UPS shall provide an optional
Variable Module Management System (VMMS), which will control the UPS to
selectively place unnecessary UPM’s in the “ready-state” based on the sensed
output load level. This is in order to drive the load higher on the remaining
UPM’s. Therefore, with multiple UPM’s, a UPS shall achieve 1-2% higher
efficiencies than conventional operation when loaded less than 30% of system
rating.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. UL 1778 (Underwriters Laboratories) – Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply
Equipment. Product safety requirements for the United States.
B. CSA C22.2 No 107.1(Canadian Standards Association) – Commercial and Industrial Power
Supplies. Product safety requirements for Canada.
C. NEMA PE-1 – (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) – Uninterruptible Power
Systems standard.
D. IEC 62040-1 (International Electrotechnical Commission) – Uninterruptible power systems
(UPS) – Part 1-1: General and safety requirements for UPS used in operator access areas.
E. IEC 62040-2 (International Electrotechnical Commission) – Uninterruptible power systems
(UPS) – Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements.
F. IEC 62040-3 (International Electrotechnical Commission) – Uninterruptible power systems
(UPS) – Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test requirements.
G. IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41) Category A & B (International Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) – Recommended practices on surge voltages in low voltage power circuits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 3
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The UPS shall be supplied with sufficient documentation, including the following
manuals:
1. Installation and Operation Manual: One copy of the installation and operation
manual shall be furnished. It shall possess sufficient detail and clarity to enable
the owner’s technicians or representatives to install and operate the UPS
equipment and accessories. The manual shall include the following major items:
a) UPS description
b) UPS site planning and unpacking
c) UPS installation
d) Optional accessory installation
e) UPS theory of operation
f) Operating procedures
g) System events
h) UPS maintenance
i) Performance and technical specifications
j) Wiring requirements and recommendations
k) Physical features and requirements
l) Cabinet dimensions
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifty years’ experience in the design,
manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS systems.
B. The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for engineering/R&D,
manufacturing facilities and service organization.
C. The UPS manufacturer shall maintain a staffed 7x24x365 call center for technical and
emergency support.
D. Field Engineering Support: The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide
field service department staffed by factory-trained field service engineers dedicated to
startup, maintenance, and repair of UPS equipment. The organization shall consist of
local offices managed from a central location. Field engineers shall be deployed in key
population areas to provide on-site emergency response within 24 hours. A map of the
United States showing the location of all field service offices must be submitted with the
proposal. Third-party maintenance will not be accepted.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 4
E. Spare Parts Support: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to provide 80% of all
emergency needs. Parts are stocked in regional logistics centers, ensuring a 95% First
Time Fix rate and maximizing system availability.
F. Product Enhancement Program: The UPS manufacturer shall make available feature
upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed. These upgrades shall be
available as optional field-installable kits.
G. Maintenance Contracts: A complete range of preventative and corrective maintenance
contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal. Under these contracts, the
manufacturer shall maintain the user’s equipment to the latest factory revisions.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The UPS shall withstand any combination of the following external environmental
conditions without operational degradation.
1. Operating Temperature for the UPS, excluding batteries: +5 degrees C to +40
degrees C (41 degrees F to 104 degrees F) for UPM loads up to 275 kW and 35
degrees C (95 degrees F) for UPM loads greater than 275 kW.
2. Storage Temperature: - 25 degrees C to + 60 degrees C (-13 degrees F to 140
degrees F). Prolonged storage above + 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) will cause
rapid battery self-discharge.
3. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 5 to 95% maximum non-condensing.
4. There shall be at least a 1.8°F (1.0°C) difference between the dry bulb
temperature and the wet bulb temperature, at all times, to maintain a non-
condensing environment
5. The maximum rate of temperature change shall be limited to 3°F over 5 minutes
(36°F/hour), based on the ASHRAE standard 90.1-2013
6. Elevation:
(1) Operational: 1000 meters above sea level at 40 C maximum
without de-rating. Above that level, altitude de-rating as per
EN62040-3
(2) Transportation: Capable of air transport
1.07 SAFETY
A. The UPS shall be certified by a US recognized NRTL (National Recognized Test Laboratory)
in accordance with UL 1778.
B. The UPS shall be certified by a Canadian Recognized Test Laboratory in accordance with
CSA C22.2 No.107.3-05.
C. The UPS shall comply with IEC 62040-1
D. The cabinets shall be NEMA 1 and IP20 rated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Eaton
2.02 UPS STANDARD FEATURES
The UPS shall consist of the following standard components and features:
A. One or more UPM’s, each consisting of:
1. Rectifier/Charger: Each rectifier/charger shall convert incoming AC power to
regulated DC output for supplying the inverter and for charging the battery. The
rectifier/charger shall be a high-frequency three-level converter design, using
Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs). The modular design of the UPS
shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the rectifier/charger
module. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the module shall be no more than 30
minutes in order to return UPS to normal mode. The rectifier/charger module
shall also provide the following:
a) The rectifier shall be capable of drawing power from the utility with a
power factor of 0.99 under nominal conditions.
b) The rectifier shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the IGBTs
from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings.
c) The rectifier to be capable of operating from a high impedance grounded
transformer.
2. Inverter: Each inverter shall feature an IGBT three- level pulse-width-
modulation (PWM) design with high speed switching. The inverter shall also
have the following features:
a) The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality output
power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier or battery)
within the specified DC operating range.
b) The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and
replacement of the inverter module. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the
module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to
normal mode.
c) The inverter shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the IGBTs
from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings.
B. ISBM section with Static Bypass: The bypass shall serve as an alternative source of
power for the critical load when an abnormal condition prevents operation in normal
mode. The bypass shall consist of a fully rated, continuous duty, naturally commutated
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 6
static switch for high-speed transfers. The bypass shall feature the following transfer and
operational characteristics.
1. Transfers to bypass shall be automatically initiated for the following conditions:
a) Output overload period expired.
b) Critical bus voltage out of limits.
c) Internal over temperature period expired.
d) Total battery discharge.
e) UPS failure.
2. Uninterrupted automatic re-transfer shall take place whenever the inverter is
capable of assuming the critical load.
3. Uninterrupted automatic re-transfers shall be inhibited for the following
conditions:
a) When transfer to bypass is activated manually or remotely.
b) In the event of multiple transfers/re-transfer operations the control
circuitry shall limit “cycling” to three (3) operations in any ten-minute
period. The fourth transfer shall lock the critical load on the bypass
source.
c) UPS failure.
4. Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control panel.
Uninterrupted manual transfers to bypass and from bypass shall be possible with
the inverter logic. During manual transfers to bypass mode, the inverter must
verify proper bypass operations before transferring the critical load to the bypass.
5. All transfers to bypass shall be inhibited for the following conditions:
a) Bypass voltage out of limits (+/- 10% of nominal)
b) Bypass frequency out of limits (+/- 3 Hz, adjustable, factory set)
c) Bypass out of synchronization
d) Bypass phase rotation / installation error
6. Static transfer time: No break, complete in less than 4ms.
7. The bypass shall be manually energized using the control panel or remotely
through a building alarm input.
C. Monitoring and control components: The following components shall provide monitor
and control capability:
1. Control panel with status indicators.
2. Alarm and metering display.
3. Building alarm monitoring.
4. Communication ports.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 7
D. Battery management system: The UPS shall contain a battery management system which
has the following features:
1. The battery management system shall provide battery time remaining while
operating in normal mode and battery mode. Battery time available information
shall be displayed real-time, even under changing load conditions. Upon
commissioning, battery runtime information shall be available.
2. The battery management system shall automatically test the battery string(s) to
ensure that the battery is capable of providing greater that 80% of its rated
capacity. Testing the batteries shall not jeopardize the operation of the critical
load. Upon detection of the battery string(s) not capable of providing 80%, the
UPS system will alarm that the battery needs attention/replacement. The battery
test shall be able to detect the following:
Open battery string
Shorted battery string
Battery capacity (runtime) less than 80% of “new” battery capacity
3. The UPS shall communicate battery test and monitoring data to the UPS
manufacturer’s remote monitoring site. Battery life remaining, capacity, and
number of on-battery events shall be provided in a monthly report.
E. Wiring Terminals: The UPS module shall contain mechanical compression terminals
(adequately sized to accommodate 90C wiring) for securing user wiring to the following
locations:
1. Rectifier/charger input connections (3-wire plus ground)
2. Bypass input connections 3-wire plus ground
3. DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative) Separate
batteries per UPM, or common batteries across all UPMs can be connected.
4. AC output connections (3 wires plus ground).
F. UPS System Configuration Features
1. UPS Configurations for Capacity and Redundancy: UPS shall be constructed
such that multiple internal UPM’s can be combined for redundancy or capacity.
Internal UPM’s shall be capable of being paralleled to increase system power
levels or to provide redundant power.
ISBM rated at 300 kW with 1 internal UPM a second UPM can be added N+1 redundancy
The UPS shall have intelligence to automatically recognize the need for capacity and/or
redundancy. The UPS shall utilize autonomous internal UPM’s that do not rely on any
control interconnections for synchronized operation. The internal UPM’s shall operate in
a peer-to-peer manner to provide automatic load sharing, synchronization, and selective
tripping capabilities. “Master-slave” configurations are not acceptable.
2. The UPS shall utilize a communications network to provide system information
and status, such as operating mode and meter data. This network shall provide
individual internal UPM information as well as total UPS information and shall
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 8
be available from the UPS front panel display. The loss of this system
information network shall not cause the UPS to transfer to bypass or drop the
critical load.
3. UPS’s with more than one internal UPM shall have the option to be inherently
redundant when the load is less than 50% of the UPS rated capacity. Under load
conditions less than 50% of rated UPS capacity, at least one internal UPM shall
be redundant.
4. Variable Module Management System option
a) VMMS User Configurable Modes The 9395 Variable Module
Management System feature shall have three configurable modes of
operation: Double Conversion, Double Conversion with VMMS, and
High Alert mode. All modes will be selectable from the front panel.
(1) Double Conversion Mode: the unit shall operate by supplying
power through each of the power converters (providing equal
load-share between all available UPM’s).
(2) Variable Module Management Mode: (VMMS), the unit shall
operate as a traditional double conversion UPS. However, the
unit will place identified UPM(s) in “ready state” based on the
following number of UPM’s required equations:
(3) High Alert Mode: all ready-state UPM’s are active for one
hour (user adjustable). At the completion of the hour, the UPS
defaults back to VMMS mode. If the high alert command is
received again during the one hour, the one-hour timer will be
restarted.
b) VMMS in Parallel Systems Variable Module Management Mode shall
support both distributed bypass and centralized bypass (SBM) parallel
configurations. SBM configurations shall support up to 8 parallel units (3
UPM’s per UPS lineup). VMMS Operation allows instantaneous UPM
transfers from VMMS “ready” Mode to Double Conversion Mode. Any
of the following shall result in all ready state UPM’s transferring from
VMMS to double conversion mode:
(1) A utility outage that results in the unit going to battery.
(2) Greater than a +/- 3 % (adjustable) voltage variation on the
output.
(3) Any UPM exceeds current limit.
(4) A UPS or UPM load >80% (user adjustable)
(5) Battery test initiated.
(6) Battery charging required.
(7) Any UPM being serviced.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 9
2.03 UPS SYSTEM OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
The UPS system shall consist of the following options and accessories as required:
A. Field upgrades: Manufacturer shall offer the ability to upgrade the capacity or
redundancy of the UPS system in the field. Manufacturer shall offer integrated UPM’s
that can be added in the field, to increase the capacity or redundancy of the UPS. UPS
design shall allow at least one integrated UPM to be added in the field.
B. SNMP Network Adapter and UPS Power Monitoring Software: SNMP adapters shall
provide a communications interface between the UPS module and SNMP-compatible
network management systems. This capability shall allow the unit to be monitored
remotely over an Ethernet network using a standard web browser.
1. UPS Power Monitoring Software: This system shall continuously monitor
critical power elements associated with the UPS, using the communications port
on each module and a customer furnished PC. The system shall automatically
alarm if any problems arise and notify local or remote personnel of the alarm
condition via email, page, or text message.
C. Battery Cabinet: The battery cabinet shall feature valve regulated, high-rate discharge,
lead-acid batteries which provide energy to the support the critical load during a
momentary loss of input power to the rectifier. The batteries shall be flame retardant in
accordance with UL 94V2 requirements as a minimum. The battery cabinet shall have
the following features:
1. The battery cabinet shall be the same depth and height as the UPS module.
2. The battery cabinet shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like appearance to the
UPS module and shall feature casters. Each battery cabinet shall require front
access only for installation, service and maintenance. The battery cabinet shall
provide top and bottom cable entry.
3. Power wiring internal to each battery cabinet shall be factory provided. Each
battery cabinet shall feature up to 10 battery trays which can be individually
disconnected from the battery cabinet power wiring with quick disconnect
devices. Each battery tray shall be firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame
with fasteners. Each battery tray shall be removable from the front of the battery
cabinet.
4. Each battery cabinet shall feature a DC rated circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
within the battery cabinet shall only provide protection to the battery string
within that battery cabinet. For battery configurations involving multiple battery
cabinets, a battery string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link
via its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the DC link
and the UPS module.
5. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature an A/B auxiliary switch.
The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and alarming an open battery
cabinet circuit breaker condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 10
6. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature a 48VDC shunt trip
device. The ST device shall operate to trip the battery breaker(s) for an optional
load off command, emergency power off command, or battery disable command.
7. The batteries shall be configured with one or more ¼” spade type connector(s)
for attaching sense leads to each jar to facilitate the future addition of a battery
monitoring system.
8. Expected battery life: 200 complete full load discharge cycles when operated
and maintained within specifications.
D Module Tie Cabinet. An external cabinet shall be available which shall allow connection
of up to four (4) UPS modules to be connected for distributed bypass parallel operation.
Module Tie Cabinet rating shall be in accordance with UPS module output ratings. This
cabinet shall be utilized where individual UPS module output disconnect and isolation is
desired via module output breakers (MOB), or when future expansion of a parallel system
is planned. Each MOB breaker shall be equipped with dual Form C auxiliary contacts for
communication back to the UPS. The Tie Cabinet shall also have the ability to house a
main output breaker and a bypass breaker. Cabinet shall be designed for remote
installation using customer-supplied wiring and conduit and shall be capable of either
free-standing or wall-mounted installation. Tie Cabinet shall consist of the following:
Voltage: 480V, 3Ph 3W
Interrupt Rating: 65 kAIC
Construction: Nema 1, PRLC Switchboard Construction , Front Accessible, UL 891, Top
Incoming
Copper Bus: 600A
Copper Neutral: NA
(3) MOB Breakers: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
MIS Breaker: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
MBP Breaker: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
Bypass Options
Interlock Scheme: 2-Key Interlock between MIS/MBP breakers with Solenoid Key
Release Unit & Indicator Lamp, Make-Before-Break
2A/2B Auxiliary Contacts: All breakers wired to terminal blocks
120VAC Shunt Trips: None
E . Global Bypass Panel. An external panel shall be provided which shall allow bypass of
the entire UPS/Tie Cabinet and ATS system. The panel shall consist of the following:
Voltage: 480V, 3Ph 3W
Interrupt Rating: 65 kAIC
Construction: Nema 1, PRLC Switchboard Construction , Front Accessible, UL 891, Top
Incoming
Copper Bus: 1200A
Copper Neutral: NA
(2) LDB Breakers: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 11
GBB Breaker: NGH-Frame, 1200AF / 500AT, 310+LS Electronic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
SIS Breaker: NGH-Frame, 1200AF / 500AT, 310+LS Electronic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
Bypass Options
Interlock Scheme: 2-Key Interlock between GBB and SIS breakers with Solenoid Key
Release Unit & Indicator Lamp, Make-Before-Break, such that in order for a
transfer to occur, the ATS-3 N.O. contact must close when the ATS-3 is in
Emergency Feed position, and the MBP break in UPS Tie is closed (via the N.O.
auxiliary contact).
2A/2B Auxiliary Contacts: All LDB breakers wired to terminal blocks
(2) 2A/2B Auxiliary Contacts: The GBB and SIS breakers, wired to terminal blocks
120VAC Shunt Trips: None
F . Rectifier Distribution Panel. An external panel shall be provided which shall provide a
main breaker, surge protection, feeder breakers for each rectifier and feeder breakers for
each UPM bypass. Rectifier Panel shall consist of the following:
Voltage: 480V, 3Ph 3W
Interrupt Rating: 65 kAIC
Construction: Nema 1, PRLC Switchboard Construction , Front Accessible, UL 891, Top
Incoming
Copper Bus: 600A
Copper Neutral: NA
One Structure – 36”W x 90”H x 30”D:
Main Breaker: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
(2) LDB Breakers: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 600AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
(2) LDB Breakers: LGH-Frame, 600AF / 500AT, Thermal Magnetic Trip, 80% rated for
continuous duty
120kA SPD with 60A Disconnect
Bypass Options
Interlock Scheme: None
2A/2B Auxiliary Contacts: All breakers wired to terminal blocks
120VAC Shunt Trips: None
2.05 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
B. UPS Continuous Ratings. The UPS shall be rated:
UPS Rating (max) is the maximum output possible from the UPS (for a load
power factor range of 0.7 lagging to 0.9 leading). The UPS shall not require de-
rating when supporting a leading power factor load of 0.9 or greater. The UPS
may be ordered with the optional rating (where available) and later upgraded to
its corresponding full UPS Rating (max).
UPS Rating (max)
275kVA/275kW
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 12
C. Rectifier/charger input:
1. Nominal three phase input voltage: 480 VAC:
3-wire plus ground input (grounded wye source or high resistance ground source,
required)
Separate inputs for each UPM are optional
2. Operating input voltage range: + 10%, - 15% of average nominal input voltage
without battery discharge. Voltage tolerance, partial load: -30% of nominal
voltage without discharging the battery at loads less than 85%.
3. Operating input frequency range shall be 45 to 65Hz.
4. Input power factor 0.99 lagging, for typical load.
5. Normal input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable
input current limit settings while operating in normal mode:
a) Rectifier input current limit shall be adjustable from 100 to 115% of full-
load input current.
b) Battery charger current limit shall be adjustable from 0 to 120 amps DC
per UPM. With decreased load, maximum charge current per UPM is
120A. Charge capability drops to zero with input line at minus 15% of
nominal voltage at full load
6. On-generator input current limit: The UPS shall have the following
programmable input current limit settings while operating in normal mode on
generator:
a) Rectifier input current limit shall be adjustable from 100% to 115% of
full-load input current.
b) Battery charger current limit shall be adjustable from 0 to 120 amps DC
per UPM. With decreased load, maximum charge current per UPM is
120A. Charge capability drops to zero with input line at minus 15% of
nominal voltage at full load
7. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 3%.
8. Power walk-in: Ramp-up to full utility load adjustable from 3 seconds to 60
seconds.
9. Optionally, a 100 kAIC input breaker rating shall be available. UPS is 100kAIC
with or without input breaker.
D. Bypass input:
1. Synchronizing bypass voltage range shall be +/- 10% of average nominal input
voltage.
2. Synchronizing bypass frequency range is centered on the nominal frequency.
3. Bypass and rectifier inputs can be supplied from out of phase sources if required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 13
4. Input surge withstand capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with IEEE 587
(ANSI C62.41), category A & B (6kV).
E. Rectifier/charger output:
1. Nominal DC voltage shall be 480VDC.
2. Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 1%.
3. Voltage ripple shall be less than 0.5% (peak-to-peak).
4. Capacity: The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded inverter and recharge
the battery to 90% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge when input
current limit is set at maximum.
5. Low line operation: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of sharing the DC load
with the battery when the input voltage falls below the specified operation input
voltage range, the on-battery indicator shall enunciate operation in this mode.
6. DC sensing: Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be incorporated for
providing battery over-voltage protection.
7. Battery charger characteristics: The UPS battery charging system shall have the
following characteristics:
a) The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge
modes including:
(1) A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the
battery to rest, reducing positive plate corrosion
(2) A charging mode floating the battery at a set level, which can be
adjusted via software, used for flooded cell applications
(a) Nominal Float Voltage: 2.27 V per cell.
(b) Equalizing Voltage: 2.31 V maximum per cell
(adjustable).
(c) Automatic (time based) or manual (user initiated)
equalization available
b) UPM will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon loading and
battery capacity.
(1) The UPM shall automatically adjust the final discharge voltage
between 1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the existing load
and the rate and length of discharge.
(2) The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.56 V per cell
(adjustable).
8. The UPM will automatically disconnect the battery system via contactor in case
of full battery discharge followed by prolonged utility AC voltage failure. The
time window before battery disconnection occurs shall be programmable for both
time and voltage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 14
F. UPS output in standard double conversion mode
1. 480V, 3-phase, 3-wire plus ground.
2. Steady-state voltage regulation (in inverter) shall be within +/- 1% average from
nominal output voltage.
3. Transient voltage response shall be compliant with Class 1 limits defined in IEC
62040-3 for 20% to 100% load step.
4. Linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than 1%
for 100% linear load.
5. Non-linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than
5% for 100% non-linear load when tested using the non-linear load described in
IEC 62040-3.
6. Manual output voltage adjustment shall be +/- 3% from nominal.
7. Line synchronization range shall be +/- 3Hz, adjustable to +/- 5Hz.
8. Frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.1Hz free running.
9. Frequency slew rate shall be adjustable up to 0.7 Hz/second maximum.
10. Phase angle control:
a) Balanced linear load shall be +/- 1 degree from nominal 120 degrees
b) Unbalanced linear loads shall less than +/- 3 degrees from average phase
voltage for 100% load unbalance.
11. Phase voltage control:
a) Balanced linear loads shall be +/- 1% from average phase voltage
b) Unbalanced linear loads shall be less than +/- 5% for 100% load
unbalanced
12. Overload current capability (with nominal line and fully charged battery): The
unit shall operate with up to 110% of resistive/inductive load for 10 minutes, up
to 125% for two minutes, and up to 150% for 10 seconds.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 15
13. Fault clearing current capability: 1000% RMS for 20ms. 600% for 50 ms. With
bypass intervention. Inverter alone (no bypass), shall produce 660A RMS per
UPM for 10 cycles.
14. Static transfer time: No break, completed in less than 4ms.
15. Acoustical noise: Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation shall not
exceed 75dbA at one meter from any operator surface, measured at 25 degrees C
(77 degrees F) and <60% load, per ISO7779 standard.
16. EMC Suppression: The UPS shall meet IEC 62040-2, Category 3.
17. Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet EN61000-4-2 level 3.
18. Efficiency: The UPS incorporates a three-level power converter design for the
highest possible efficiency. Efficiency shall be up to 97%, with 25 percent load
efficiency not less than 96.1%, with 50 percent load efficiency not less than
96.9%, 75 percent load efficiency not less than 96.5%, and 100 percent load
efficiency not less than 96.4%. In VMMS mode the UPS shall operate at no less
than 96% efficiency at loads down to 15% of UPS capacity. If UPS requires
input filters for controlling input THD, manufacturer shall state efficiency of
UPS with input filters connected.
G. UPS output with Energy Saver System
1. The Energy Saver System acts to optimize the internal components of the UPS
power train to maximize system efficiency when the bypass source is within the
following (adjustable) limits: Voltage: +/-10%, and Frequency: +/-3Hz.
2. 480V, 3-phase, 3-wire plus ground.
3. Steady-state voltage regulation (in inverter) shall be within +/- 10% from
nominal output voltage.
4. Line synchronization range shall be +/- 3Hz, adjustable to +/- 5Hz.
5. Frequency regulation shall be +/-3Hz when bypass source is within limits in (1)
above.
6. Overload current capability (with bypass source within the limits of (1) above)
1000% for 20msec, 600% for 50 ms
7. Static transfer time: for input outage: No break, completed in less than 2ms.
8. Acoustical noise: Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation shall not
exceed 75dbA at one meter from any operator surface, measured at 25 degrees C
(77 degrees F) and full load.
9. EMC Suppression: The UPS shall meet IEC 62040-2, Category C3.
10. Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet EN61000-4-2 level 3.
11. Efficiency: The UPS efficiency shall be up to 99%. over the range of 10 to 100%
load. If UPS requires input filters for controlling input THD, manufacturer shall
state efficiency of UPS with input filters connected.
H. UPS in Distributed Bypass Parallel Configurations:
UPS modules (300 or 600 kW lineups) shall be capable of being paralleled to increase
system power levels or to provide redundant power. A total of four (4) UPS modules
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 16
shall be capable of parallel operation, either for capacity or redundant systems, where
each UPS lineup contains a discrete static switch, and without a central static
switch/bypass cabinet. A simple “tie cabinet” with module output breakers (MOB) shall
be required. Each MOB shall have dual sets of form C auxiliary contacts to provide
breaker status to the UPS modules. The parallel system shall have intelligence to
automatically recognize the need for capacity and/or redundancy. Parallel systems shall
utilize autonomous UPS power modules that do not rely on any control interconnections
for synchronized operation. The individual modules shall operate in a peer-to-peer
manner to provide automatic load sharing, synchronization, and selective tripping
capabilities. “Master-slave” configurations are not acceptable.
I. The parallel system shall utilize a communications network to provide system
information and status, such as operating mode and meter data. This network shall
provide individual module information as well as total system information, and individual
module information shall be available from any module’s front panel display. The loss of
this system information network shall not cause the parallel units to transfer to bypass or
drop the critical load.
2.06 MECHANICAL DESIGN
A. Ventilation: The UPS shall be designed for forced-air cooling. Air inlets shall be on the
front of the unit. Air outlets shall be on the top. Eighteen inches of clearance over the
UPS outlets shall be required for proper air circulation. .
B. No back or side clearance or access shall be required for the system. The back and side
enclosure covers shall be capable of being located directly adjacent to a wall.
C. Cable entry: Standard cable entry for the UPS cabinet shall be through either the
enclosure bottom or top. A dedicated wireway shall be provided within the UPS cabinet
for routing user input and output wiring.
D. Front access: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and capable of being
replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only required). Side or rear access for
installation, service, repair or maintenance of the UPS system shall not be required.
E. Service area requirements: The system shall require no more than forty-two (42) inches
of front service access room and shall not require side or rear access for service or
installation.
F. Shipping Shock and Vibration: Per ASTM D4169
G. Seismic Standards: UPS modules shall be designed to meet California Building Code
2010, International Building Code 2009, and OSHPD seismic requirements, when Eaton
seismic bracing kits are installed.
H. Dimensions: All modules that comprise the UPS will be 34.3 in, (871mm) depth and
73.3 in. (1872mm) height. Width will vary as necessary to fit the parts and options and to
facilitate ease of installation. Width of 300 kW frame sections will be 21.3 in. (540 mm)
in width. Field installable 300 kW UPM shall be 30 in. (762 mm) in width
2.07 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 17
A. Microprocessor controlled circuitry: The UPS controls shall have the following design
and operating characteristics:
1. Fully automatic operation of the UPS shall be provided through the use of
microprocessor controlled Digital Signal Processing. DSP shall eliminate
variances from component tolerance or drift and provide consistent operational
responses.
2. All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus
eliminating a need for manual adjustments. The logic shall include system test
capability to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting. Printed circuit board
replacement shall be possible without requiring calibration.
3. Start-up and transfers shall be automatic functions.
B. Digital Front Panel Display: The UPS control panel shall be a digital front panel display
that features a 7” Color Touchscreen LCD. The LCD shall display UPS status, metering,
battery status, alarm/event queue, and active alarms. The front panel display shall show a
system mimic diagram with an outlined power path, current operating mode and event
logs, as well as statistics and load profiling.
C. Control Panel Information: The UPS control panel shall provide the following menus
and functions from the front panel touchscreen LCD:
1. HOME: Displays the power map of the UPS with colors indicating the power
flow (online or bypass mode). Also displays data pertaining to system load and
efficiency.
2. METERS: Displays performance meters for the system or critical load. When
selected, the front display shall show individual screens of input parameters,
output parameters or bypass parameters including; voltage, current and frequency
in a graphical format. In addition, the battery display shall show runtime
remaining. In a parallel system, meters for the local UPS and the other UPS in
the system can be viewed.
3. CONTROLS: Allows selection of operating mode, normal, bypass, charger
on/off and Power Module on/off. Individual UPMs can also be controlled
through this screen. The EAA controls screen can be used to enable and disable
installed Energy Advantage Architecture options
4. POWER MAPS: Shows the power flow for the system via the UPS Power Map
and shows UPM detail through the UPS Module Map (for the local UPS). In a
parallel system, the System Overview displays the entire parallel system with the
ability to access any UPS information in the system.
5. LOGS: Displays the list of Active System Events and a historical log of system
events. Historical logs shall include a detailed time stamped list of over 300
events. Events shall include detailed information including the description,
source, type, and solution.
Battery log shall include Time on Battery, Load on Battery, End Voltage, and
Source (UPM). The battery log shall also include the Average Time and Total
Time on Battery for each UPM.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 18
6. STATISTICS: This screen shall summarize the time on various modes for the
current month, prior month, and since the last reset. This includes Online, Online
ESS, Online VMMS, On Bypass and On Battery. A graphical comparison shall
show the consumption in Double Conversion Mode and ESS, along with
estimated savings.
7. SETTINGS: Allows configuration of the unit including meters format, ESS and
VMMS configuration, backlight adjustments, display contrast, date and time
information, serial communication port configuration, and display of firmware
revision numbers.
8. STATUS BAR: A status across the top of the screen displays unit name,
date/time, active alarms, system voltage and frequency, and battery levels. Two
interactive buttons on the Status Bar allow for language changes and passcode
input.
D. Control Panel Indicators: The UPS display panel shall also include the following
monitoring functions via indicator LED’s:
1. ONLINE: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or generator source
is supplying power to the rectifier and the inverter is supporting the critical load.
2. BYPASS: This shall indicate that the UPS has transferred the load to the bypass
circuit.
3. BATTERY: This shall indicate that battery is supplying power to the inverter,
which is supporting the load. A text message shall indicate if the battery charge
is low or if the battery is installed but disconnected.
4. ALARM: This shall indicate that the UPS detects an alarm condition, outlined in
detail in the operator’s manual.
E. Interface panel: The UPS shall be equipped with an interface panel, located behind a
protective cover, which provides the following signals and communication features in a
Class 2 environment:
1. Alarm contact: A dry contact for annunciating a summary alarm shall be
provided for customer use. This contact shall be Form “C” capable of supplying
both N/O and N/C contacts. Contact ratings shall be 5A max at a voltage not to
exceed 28VDC or 277VAC.
2. RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communications interface: Circuitry shall be provided
for one RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communication port for connection to automated
service department diagnostic tools. This port may be used with simple
(“dumb”) terminals to gain remote access to all unit operation information.
3. Building Alarm Inputs: The unit will have four configurable, galvanic isolated
(SELV) "building alarm" inputs provided for monitoring the status of external
dry contacts. Building alarms shall be set up through the UPS configuration
mode function on the RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) port.
4. External EPO contacts: Shall be provided to connect an external remote
emergency power off switch to shutdown the UPS and de-energize the critical
load.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 19
5. Battery control contacts: Contacts shall be provided to connect the battery shunt
trip and auxiliary signals from a battery breaker or battery disconnect switch.
6. External bypass indicator connection: A connection point shall be provided to
acknowledge that an external maintenance bypass has been closed around the
UPS, placing the critical load on utility power.
7. The following display languages are supported: English, French, Spanish,
Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, German, Italian, Korean, Russian, and
Portuguese
2.08 COMMUNICATIONS
A. Communications Bay: The UPS shall be equipped with field configurable
communications bays that will accommodate four (4) communication devices.
B. Remote Monitoring:
1. Optional WEB/SNMP communication capabilities will be available for all
systems.
2. The UPS shall be able to be monitored remotely via communications devices.
UPS manufacturer shall provide optional communications devices capable of
communicating via various industry standard protocols such as RS232, BACnet,
and ModBus. Monitoring of UPS status may also be performed through isolated
dry contact Form C relays.
3. Remote monitoring of the UPS shall also be possible through status indicators
elsewhere in the same facility through a device that replicates these indicators.
The UPS communication capability should be able to integrate into any industry standard
Building Management System (BMS) and/or Network Management System (NMS). The
UPS must also be able to be monitored via any standard Internet browser.
All optional hardware interfaces shall be “Hot-swappable” (UPS maintains power to
critical applications while changing interfaces).
C. Shutdown:
1. There shall be a mechanism that provides graceful, orderly, unattended,
sequential shutdown of one or multiple computers powered by one UPS. This
shutdown shall be performed via in-network or out-of-network means. The order
of shutdown shall be user-defined, allowing the maximization of runtime on
battery for more critical systems.
2. Shutdown of AS/400 computers shall be possible through open-collector relay
contacts or isolated, dry contact, Form-C relays.
3. The UPS shall also be capable of interfacing with an operating system’s built-in
shutdown routine. This shall be done through a cable connection to the optional
network port on the UPS.
D. Notification:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 20
1. There shall be a mechanism to send alerts to key personnel via email or SNMP
traps. An alarm notification may also be sent by a network message.
2. Network access to a computer for alarm notification may be provided. The user
may respond by connecting via the network to retrieve alarm history and a
summary of current meter status.
3. Management: A remote battery test may be performed via an Ethernet network.
The UPS shall be tested through invocation of a single command.
2.08 UPS PROTECTION
A. Rectifier/Charger and Bypass protection shall be provided through fusing.
B. Battery protection shall be provided by thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breakers in
each battery cabinet (if standard battery pack is provided) or external protective device
for an external battery.
C. Electronic current limiting circuitry and fuses in the Inverter circuit shall provide output
protection.
D. To comply with agency safety requirements, the UPS shall not rely upon any disconnect
devices outside of the UPS to isolate the battery cabinet from the UPS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. See attached draft wire charts for control wiring to be provided by contractor
including terminations. Coordinate with Eaton prior to startup for final wiring
information.
3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. Factory start-up shall be provided on a 7 x 24 basis. Start-up service shall be provided at
no extra charge and shall include one visit to perform all procedures and tests specified
within UPS Installation and Operation manual. UPS manufacturer shall also offer the
following optional services:
1. Pre-energize visit to inspect installation and provide guidance to installers as
required.
2. Post-start-up visit for alarm notification configuration, operator training,
generator testing, etc.
B. The following procedures and tests shall be performed by Field Service personnel during
the UPS startup:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 21
1.Visual Inspection:
a)Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials.
b)Observe the type of ventilation, the cleanliness of the room, the use of
proper signs, and any other safety related factors.
2.Mechanical Inspection:
a)Check all the power connections for tightness.
b)Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or
proper seating.
3.Electrical Pre-check:
a)Check the DC bus for a possible short circuit.
b)Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase rotation.
c)Check all lamp test functions.
4.Initial UPS Startup:
a)Verify that all the alarms are in a “go” condition.
b)Energize the UPS module and verify the proper DC, walkup, and AC
phase on.
c)Check the DC link holding voltage, AC output voltages, and output
waveforms.
d)Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC output. Adjust if
required.
e)Check for the proper synchronization.
f)Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and the
Bypass source.
g)Optional internal load testing: The UPS system will be capable of
utilizing the Easy Capacity Test (ECT) function, including internally
adjustable load testing at the customer site, without the need for a load
bank. Testing shall only be initiated using the Eaton Engineer’s Software
Service Tool. This testing is not intended to be performed while the UPS
is servicing the critical load
5.Operational Training: Before leaving the site, the field service engineer shall
familiarize responsible personnel with the operation of the UPS. The UPS
equipment shall be available for demonstration of the modes of operation.
3.03 WARRANTY
All components of the UPS system shall be covered by a standard one-year limited factory
warranty and service protection package.
One-year limited factory warranty shall include replacement coverage for the UPS parts for a
period of 18 months from shipment or 12 months from start-up, whichever occurs sooner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263353
Ithaca, New York STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263353 - 22
One-year service protection package shall include 7x24 on-site repair/replacement labor for UPS
parts and batteries; 7x24 technical support coverage; and 7x24 remote monitoring service (with
monthly reports for UPS and battery performance). Standard response time shall be 8 hours from
receipt of call. Manufacturer shall also offer, as an option, 7x24 on-site service support with
guaranteed response times of 4, or 2 hours in certain major metropolitan areas. Additional
preventive maintenance visits shall be available as an option for both UPS and battery
components.
Manufacturer shall also include Start-up services consisting of: 7x24 Start-up service of UPS and
batteries. On-site user training, Site Audit, installation and commissioning of monitoring service,
and validation of one-year limited factory warranty will be performed during the start-up.
Manufacturer shall also offer an optional service plan to provide 7x24 on-site coverage
(preventive and corrective) for UPS and batteries, guaranteed response time, remote monitoring,
Web access to service site history, annual Site Audit, UPS and battery preventive maintenance
visit, and discounts on upgrade and modification kits. Manufacturer shall also provide an
optional battery service plan to provide parts-and-labor coverage for partial and full battery
strings, either with preventive maintenance or replacement coverage.
END
NOTES:
1. USE TWISTED CONDUCTORS WHERE NOTED (TWIST AT APPROX. 1 TWIST PER INCH).
2. ALL WIRING AND GROUNDING TECHNIQUES SHOULD FOLLOW LOCAL AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CODES.
3.INSTALLATION MATERIAL AND LABOR PROVIDED BY OTHERS.
4. REFER TO EATON 9395 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL
164201725267121 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON DISTRIBUTED BYPASS CAN NETWORK WIRING AND
TERMINATIONS INFORMATION
5. REFER TO EATON 9395 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL
164201725267121 FOR PULL-CHAIN WITH MOB’S WIRING AND TERMINATIONS INFORMATION
6. SYMBOL IN REMARKS SECTION INDICATES REFERENCE TO CONDUIT RUN ON ONELINE
LEGEND
UPS:UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
MBD:MODULE BATTERY DISCONNECT
RMP:REMOTE MONITORING PANEL
N.O.:NORMALLY OPEN (BREAKER AUX. SWITCH OR RELAY CONTACT)
N.C.:NORMALLY CLOSE (BREAKER AUX. SWITCH OR RELAY CONTACT)
AUX. SW: BREAKER AUXILIARY SWITCHDRAFT
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
20 CAN Bridge Card-1
J3-8 ----CAN Bridge Card-
1 J3-8 ----Can Network -1 (L)Black
20 CAN Bridge Card-1
J3-9 ----CAN Bridge Card-
1 J3-9 ----Can Network -1 (H)Red
20 CAN Bridge Card-1
J3-10 ----CAN Bridge Card-
1 J3-10 ----Can Network -1 (Shield)Shield
NOTE: The above wiring is typical network for UPS systems
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
Output
Switchboard
14 UPS1 IRC_K1 --------NORMAL TWIST
14 UPS1 IRC K1_C --------NORMAL TOGETHER
14 UPS2 IRC_K1_C --------NORMAL TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
Output
Switchboard
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-3 ----
SKRU KEY -
*TB2–1 ----Bld. Alarm 2*TWIST
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-4 ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-2 ----Bld. Alarm 2 RTN TOGETHER
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-3 ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-4 ----Bld. Alarm 2*TWIST
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-4 ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-5 ----Bld. Alarm 2 RTN TOGETHER
CC
TWISTED /
SHIELDED
PAIR
14 UPS2 IRC K1 --------NORMAL
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE TO SWBD- * (SKRU)
REMARKS
UPS MODULE
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE –1 to UPS MODULE -2
REMARKS
UPS MODULE 1 UPS MODULE 2
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE TO SKRU KEY RELEASED
REMARKS
UPS MODULE
FIELD
NOTE
FIELD
NOTE
FIELD
NOTE
TWIST
CE1
CE2
CE1
CE2DRAFT
14 TB1-7 ---- TB-11 ----DC BKR TRIP (+) 48VDC TWISTED
14 ---- TB-12 ----TRIP (-)PAIR
14 TB1-5 ---- TB-2 ----DC BKR AUX N.O. TWISTED
14 TB1-6 ---- Note 2 ----AUX common PAIR
BATT CAB #1 BATT CAB #2 FIELD
NOTE
TB-11 TB-11 DC BKR TRIP (+) 48VDC TWISTED
TB-12 TB-12 TRIP (-)PAIR
TB-3 TB-2 DC BKR AUX N.O. TWISTED
14 Note 2 ---- TB-3 ----AUX common PAIR
14 TB1-7 ---- TB-11 ----DC BKR TRIP (+) 48VDC TWISTED
14 ---- TB-12 ----TRIP (-)PAIR
14 TB1-5 ---- TB-2 ----DC BKR AUX N.O. TWISTED
14 TB1-6 ---- Note 2 ----AUX common PAIR
14 TB-11 ---- TB-11 ----DC BKR TRIP (+) 48VDC TWISTED
14 TB-12 ---- TB-12 ----TRIP (-)PAIR
14 TB-3 ---- TB-2 ----DC BKR AUX N.O. TWISTED
14 Note 2 ---- TB-3 ----AUX common PAIR
UPS #1 BATT CAB #1
WIRE CHART FOR:
UPS #1 TO BATTERY CAB #1, BATT CAB #1 TO BATT CAB #2
UPS #2 TO BATT CAB #3, BATT CAB #3 TO BATT CAB #4
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM REMARKS
Note 1: Terminal block positions in Battery Cabinet may not be numbered. Positions 11 & 12
contain the shunt trip black wires, position 2 contains the AUX common, and position 3 contains
the AUX NO.
Note 2: AUX contacts connected in series circuit (see figure below). The AUX common passes
from UPS thru BATT CAB#1, 2, & 3 to terminate in #4.
BATT CAB #3 BATT CAB #4
FIELD
NOTE
FIELD
NOTE
FIELD
NOTE
UPS #2 BATT CAB #3
CD1
CD2
CD3
FIELD
NOTE
CD4DRAFT
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
SWITCHBOARD
MOB –1
Aux 1-N.C
MOB-1
Aux 1-Com
MOB –1
Aux 2-N.O TWIST
TOGETHER
MOB –2
Aux 1-N.C
MOB-2
Aux 1-Com
MOB –2
Aux 2-N.O TWIST
TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM REMARKS
MOB MOB
14 MOB-1 AUX 2 COM ----
MOB-2 AUX 2
COM ----PULL CHAIN MOB COM
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE CAN CARD 1 TO MOB PULL-CHAIN
REMARKS
UPS MODULE
14 CAN Bridge Card-1
UPS-1 J3-1 --------MOB Open Alarm
14 CAN Bridge Card-1
UPS-1 J3-2 ---- ----MOB Open Alarm Return
Pull Chain Common
14 CAN Bridge Card-1
UPS-2 J3-1 ---- ----MOB Open Alarm
14 UPS-1 ISBM TB2-1 --------Pull Chain
14 UPS-1 ISBM TB2-2 ----UPS-2 ISBM TB2-
2 ----
14 UPS-2 ISBM TB2-2 --------Pull Chain Common
14 CAN Bridge Card-1
UPS-2 J3-2 ---- ----MOB Open Alarm Return
14 UPS-2 ISBM TB2-1 --------Pull Chain
WIRE CHART FOR: PULL CHAIN MOB’S COMMON
FIELD
NOTE
TWIST
TOGETHER
TWIST
TOGETHER
CE1
CE1
CE2
CE2
CE2
FIELD
NOTEDRAFT
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
RJ-45
CAT6
ETHERNET
NETWORK --- PXGX Card --- CG
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-7 ---- N.O. ----Bld. Alarm 4 TWIST
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-8 ---- COM ----Bld. Alarm 4 RTN TOGETHER
TWIST
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-8 ---- COM ----Bld. Alarm 4 RTN TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
Output
Switchboard
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-5 ---- *MIS N.C. #1 ----Bld. Alarm 3*TWIST
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-6 ---- *MIS COM #1 ----Bld. Alarm 3 RTN TOGETHER
TWIST
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-6 ---- *MIS COM #2 ----Bld. Alarm 3 RTN TOGETHER
Customer
Monitoring System UPS-x
FIELD
NOTE
FIELD
NOTE UPS MODULE
FIELD
NOTE
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-5 ---- *MIS N.C. #2 ----Bld. Alarm 3*
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-7 ---- N.O. ----
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE TO MIS BREAKER
REMARKS
Bld. Alarm 4
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE TO ATS (ON GENERATOR)
REMARKS
UPS MODULE GENERATOR
The above is typical for each UPS module in the UPS system
WIRE CHART FOR: MONITORING SYSTEM TO UPS MODULE (EACH UPS)
REMARKS
CB
CB
CE1
CE2DRAFT
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
Output
Switchboard
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-9 ---- *MBP N.O. #1 ----Bld. Alarm 5*TWIST
14 UPS1 ISBM TB3-10 ---- *MBP COM #1 ----Bld. Alarm 5 RTN TOGETHER
TWIST
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-10 ---- *MBP COM #2 ----Bld. Alarm 5 RTN TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
14 N.O. ---- N.O. ----
ATS-3 Emergency Source
Closed TWIST
14 COM ---- COM ----
ATS-3 Emergency Source
Closed RTN
TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
14 N.O. ----
SKRU KEY -
*TB2–3 ----ATS-5 Emergency Source
Closed TWIST
14 COM ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-4 ----ATS-5 Emergency Source
Closed RTN
TOGETHER
WIRE
SIZE FROM END
ITEM TO END
ITEM
14 MBP N.O. #3 ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-1 ----MBP Closed TWIST
14 MBP COM #3 ----
SKRU KEY –
*TB2-2 ----MBP Closed RTN TOGETHER
ATS-5
EMERGENCY
SOURCE
GBB SWBD
SKRU
FIELD
NOTE
ATS-3
EMERGENCY
SOURCE
ATS-5
EMERGENCY
SOURCE
FIELD
NOTE
14 UPS2 ISBM TB3-9 ---- *MBP N.O. #2 ----Bld. Alarm 5*
WIRE CHART FOR: UPS MODULE TO MBP BREAKER
REMARKS
UPS MODULE FIELD
NOTE
WIRE CHART FOR: NEW ATS-5 TO SKRU KEY RELEASED
REMARKS
WIRE CHART FOR: ATS-3 TO NEW ATS-5
REMARKS
WIRE CHART FOR: TIE SWBD MBP TO SKRU KEY RELEASED
REMARKS
TIE MBP NC
Switchboard
FIELD
NOTE
GBB SWBD
SKRU
CE1
CE2
CA
CA1
CFDRAFT
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer
Switch Equipment; 2005, with Errata (2006).
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2016.
G. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate compatibility of transfer switches to be installed with work provided under
other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working
clearances required by NFPA 70.
3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of
the actual equipment to be installed.
4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
5. Closed Transition Transfer Switches:
a. Where applicable, coordinate the work to provide engine generators with isochronous
governors suitable for closed transition transfer.
b. Coordinate the work to provide shunt trip breakers necessary for protection from
source interconnection for longer than specified maximum interconnection time.
6. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product,
including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements,
and installed features.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-2
C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of system
components, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include system
interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
D. Source quality control test reports.
E. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
2. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems); meet requirements for
system Level specified in Section 26 32 13.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to transfer
switch components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to
defective materials or workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Transfer Switches:
1. ASCO Power Technologies: www.ascopower.com/#sle.
2.Kohler Power
3. Russelectric
2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating
system that provides the functional intent indicated.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Applications:
1. Utilize closed transition transfer unless otherwise indicated or required.
D. Construction Type: Either "contactor type" (open contact) or "breaker type" (enclosed contact)
transfer switches complying with specified requirements are acceptable.
E. Automatic Transfer Switch:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-3
1. Transfer Switch Type: Automatic transfer switch.
2.Transition Configuration: Closed-transition.
3. Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Ampere Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
5. Neutral Configuration: Solid neutral (unswitched), except as indicated.
6. Load Served: As indicated on the drawings.
7. Primary Source: As indicated on the drawings.
8. Alternate Source: As indicated on the drawings.
F. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the
classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).
G. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for power
transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.
H. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric
discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30
percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required.
I. Switching Methods:
1. Closed Transition:
a. When both sources are available and synchronized, provide make-before-break
transfer without interruption of power to the load and with momentary
interconnection of both sources for not more than 100 ms, unless otherwise approved
by Utility Company.
b. Provide synchronization/in-phase monitor to initiate transfer when voltage and phase
angle difference between sources are within predetermined requirements for
synchronization.
c. Source Synchronization Requirements: Phase angle differential within five degrees;
voltage differential within five volts.
d. When sources fail to synchronize within a predetermined time period, remain
connected to current source and initiate an alarm.
e. When sources remain interconnected for longer than specified maximum
interconnection time, provide contact closure signal to shunt trip designated circuit
breaker and initiate an alarm.
f. When only one source is available, automatically utilizes open transition (break-
before-make) transfer.
2. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is to
be transferred.
J. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
K. Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
L. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches, when protected by the supply
side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand and closing rating
not less than 65kAIC.
M. Automatic Transfer Switches:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-4
1. Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between sources;
electrically operated and mechanically held.
2. Control Functions:
a. Automatic mode.
b. Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source.
c. Voltage and Frequency Sensing:
1) Undervoltage sensing for each phase of primary/normal source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
2) Undervoltage sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable dropout/pickup
settings.
3) Underfrequency sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
d. Outputs:
1) Contacts for engine start/shutdown (except where direct generator
communication interface is provided) (Quantity of 2).
2) Auxiliary contacts:
Form "C" contact to indicate source 1 availability. (Quantity of 2)
Auxiliary contact closed in source 1 position. (Quantity of 2)
Form "C" contact to indicate source 2 availability. (Quantity of 2)
Auxiliary contact closed in source 2 position. (Quantity of 2)
e. Adjustable Time Delays:
1) Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to override
momentary primary/normal source failures.
2) Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.
3) Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.
4) Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine shutdown following
retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run unloaded for
cooldown period.
f. Synchronization/In-Phase Monitor (Closed Transition Transfer Switches): Monitors
voltage and phase angle difference between sources for initiating synchronized
transfer.
g. Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine generator
selectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory retention during power
outage.
3. Status Indications:
a. Connected to alternate/emergency source.
b. Connected to primary/normal source.
c. Alternate/emergency source available.
4. Alarm Indications for Closed Transition Transfer Switches:
a. Failure to synchronize.
b. Extended source interconnection/transfer switch locked out.
5. Automatic Sequence of Operations:
a. Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period (engine
generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator where applicable.
b. When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to alternate/emergency
source after programmable time delay.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-5
c. When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to primary/normal source
after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay if alternate/emergency source
fails and primary/normal source is available.
d. Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable engine
cooldown time delay.
5. Accessories to be included:
Ethernet port for the RPTCS
Power monitor with voltage and frequency measurement of each phase of both
source-1 and source-2, current measurement of each phase of the load circuit,
power factor of load relative to either voltage source, and true and reactive power
consumption of the load circuit.
Engine overrun function to provide unloaded engine operation after retransfer to
source 1 (delay for engine cooldown), programmable 0:0-60:59 min:sec.
(Internal)
Time delay to override momentary source 1 power outages to delay engine start
signal and transfer switch operation (delay for generator start). Programmable
0:0-259:59 min:sec. A time setting greater than 10 seconds Requires an external
24 volt DC, 1 amp
Time delay to control contact transition time from neutral to nonpreferred source.
Programmable 0:0-10:59 min:sec. (Internal)
Time delay to control contact transition time from neutral to preferred source.
Programmable 0:0-10:59 min:sec. (Internal)
Time delay on retransfer to preferred source (delay - xfer to preferred source).
Programmable 0:0-259:59 min:sec. (Internal)
Load test function to simulate source 1 power failure. (Internal)
External manual operator.(shipped loose)
Current transformer shorting terminal block for load circuit.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Perform production tests on transfer switches at factory to verify operation and performance
characteristics prior to shipment. Include certified test report with submittals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.
D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 263600
Ithaca, New York TRANSFER SWITCHES
Rhodes Hall UPS Replacement 263600-6
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E. Install transfer switches plumb and level.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch
high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and assist
in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field reports
with submittals.
C. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. The insulation-
resistance tests listed as optional are not required.
E. Provide additional inspection and testing as required for completion of associated engine
generator testing as specified in Section 26 32 13.
F. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
Contract Documents.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of transfer switches to Owner, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of transfer
switches.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of 2 hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 1
SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Releasing control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Notification appliances.
5. Addressable interface device.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D. PC: Personal computer.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: For releasing system.
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the
"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor
sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory
and field wiring.
4. Detail assembly and support requirements.
5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.
6. Include battery-size calculations.
7. Include input/output matrix.
8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested
as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 2
9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
10. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
C. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them
to Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in releasing system design.
b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For releasing systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Include the following;
a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of
Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the
"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and
equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with
indication of origination and termination points.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Device addresses.
f. Record copy of site-specific software.
g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at releasing control unit and each
annunciator unit.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 3
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than one unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer
than one unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Gas Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of
amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no
fewer than one unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper proofed components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with
compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm
Level III technician.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or
components not functioning as designed.
B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 4
C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are
placed in service to protect the facility during construction.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace releasing system equipment and
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service
Agreement.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Source Limitations for Releasing System and Components: Components shall be compatible
with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's
certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.
B. Noncoded, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe
evacuation.
C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.
D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Releasing signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual fire-alarm stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Water flow pressure switch
B. Releasing signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at releasing control unit
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the building fire alarm control panel.
4. Activate alarm communication system.
5. Energize electric solenoid valve for preaction system.
6. Activate battery charging power shunt trip.
7. Record events in the system memory.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 5
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
3. Independent gas detection devices.
4. User disabling of zones or individual devices.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control
module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.
4. Loss of primary power at releasing control unit.
5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of releasing control unit.
6. Abnormal ac voltage at releasing control unit.
7. Break in standby battery circuitry.
8. Failure of battery charging.
9. Abnormal position of any switch at releasing control unit.
E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:
1. Initiate gas detection notification appliances.
2. Identify specific device initiating the event at releasing control unit.
3. Record the event on system printer.
4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote
alarm receiving station.
5. Transmit system status to building management system.
2.3 RELEASING CONTROL UNIT
A. Manufacturers
1. Autocall.
2. Edwards.
3. Gamewell-FCI.
4. Notifier.
5. Potter.
6. Or approved equal.
B. General Requirements for Releasing Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864.
a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically
erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 6
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and
printer.
c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels,
annunciators, and displays.
d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system
service.
e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and
event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of
a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event
history log.
2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication
zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification
appliance by building communication zone.
3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical
Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.
C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
releasing control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.
D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
releasing control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
E. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:
1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.
2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.
3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.
4. Serial Interfaces:
a. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface
module (printer port).
b. One USB port for PC configuration.
F. Notification-Appliance Circuit:
1. Audible appliances for fire alarm shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined
in NFPA 72.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 7
2. Audible appliances for gas alarm shall sound in a whoop, high-low, or coded pattern.
Three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72 is not permitted.
3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in
the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
G. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and
sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted
values on system printer.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be
powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire releasing system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.
K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or
glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe
appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 PREACTION SYSTEM
A. Initiate Presignal Alarm: This function shall cause an audible and visual alarm and indication to
be provided at the FACP. Activation of an initiation device connected as part of a preaction
system shall be annunciated at the FACP only, without activation of the general evacuation
alarm.
2.5 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Autocall.
2. Edwards.
3. Gamewell-FCI.
4. Notifier.
5. Potter.
6. Or approved equal.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 8
B. General Requirements for Manual Releasing Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with
integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to releasing control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Manufacturers
1. Autocall.
2. Edwards.
3. Gamewell-FCI.
4. Notifier.
5. Potter.
6. Or approved equal.
B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to releasing control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-
on status.
7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,
individually monitored at releasing control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by releasing control unit.
a. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
b. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.
C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from releasing control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at releasing control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 9
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
2.7 HYDROGEN GAS DETECTORS
A. General: H
2 (Hydrogen) gas detector listed for connection to releasing system.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Testable by introducing test hydrogen into the sensing cell.
3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.
4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or
internal faults.
5. Comply with AS 1668.2.
6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Provide means for addressable connection to releasing system.
8. Sampling Range: 0 to 100% of Lower Flammability Limit
9. Alarm 1 Setpoint at 12.5% of Lower Flammability Limit of Hydrogen Gas Bluetooth
Capable for setup and calibration (Basis of Design, Honeywell Sensapoint XCL).
2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Manufacturers for fire alarm horn strobes
1. Autocall.
2. Edwards.
3. Gamewell-FCI.
4. Notifier.
5. Potter.
6. Or approved equal.
B. Manufacturers for gas detection horn strobes
1. Gentex.
2. System Sensor.
3. Wheelock.
4. Or approved equal.
C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a
signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system
connections.
D. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for
system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for
system connections.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 10
E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test
protocol.
F. Visible Notification Appliances – Fire Alarm: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971,
with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word
"FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, RED.
G. Visible Notification Appliances – Gas Detection: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971,
with red polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "ALERT" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, RED.
2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. General:
1. Include address-setting means on the module.
2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.
3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.
B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating
devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.
2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for
field wiring.
D. Control Module:
1. Operate notification devices.
2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,
humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before
installation begins.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
installation and testing of releasing equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with
requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."
1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be
replaced.
2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,
debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage
instructions.
B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing monitoring equipment as necessary to extend
existing monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of
merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.
C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the
finished floor.
D. Manual Releasing Boxes:
1. Install manual releasing box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit
doorway.
2. Mount manual releasing box on a background of a contrasting color.
3. The operable part of manual releasing box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches
above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise
indicated.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 12
E. Smoke-Spacing:
1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"
chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.
2. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet
3. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high
ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.
4. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting
fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.
F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover
shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.
G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells
and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind
a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PATHWAYS
A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.
1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.
B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.
C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shunt trip to battery charging systems.
2. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
3. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each pre-action sprinkler system.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Install framed instructions in a
location visible from releasing control unit.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 13
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground releasing control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to releasing control unit.
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Engineer of Record and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table
in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section
of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72
and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
F. Releasing system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
Cornell University - Rhodes Hall GHD # 11205715
UPS Replacement
ADDRESSABLE RELEASING SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 14
I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test releasing
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service
organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and
supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the
"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Comply with UL 864.
B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include
software support for two years.
C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial
Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for
using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to
upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain releasing system.
END OF SECTION 284621.11